义
务
教
育
教
科
书
绿色印刷产品
价格批准文号：
价格投诉举报电话：12315
英
语
ENGLISH
七
年
级
上
册
义 务 教 育 教 科 书
英 语
七年级 上册
E N G L I S H
定价：10.40元
义 务 教 育 教 科 书
英 语
科 学 普 及 出 版 社
·北 京·
七年级 上册
E
N
G
L
I
S
H
前 言
亲爱的同学们：
你们好！
本套教科书根据我国《义务教育英语课程标准（2022年版）》编写，旨在帮助你们
通过英语课程的学习，逐步形成核心素养，在提高英语语言能力的同时，领略中外优秀文
化，养成良好思想品德，发展终身学习能力。
本套教科书分为六册，共三十三个单元。每个单元围绕一个主题，先由开篇页导入，
再分四个板块从不同侧面展开学习。
开篇页为一幅精美的主题插图，图上附有单元序号和标题、一个主题之问，以及语言
交际、文化学习、思维训练、策略运用和项目实践五个方面的学习目标。这些图文可以帮
助你们了解单元主题、明确学习目标，激发你们对单元主题的学习兴趣。
开篇页之后是“准备”板块。该板块包括听说（Listening & Speaking）、功能
（Function）和语音（Pronunciation）三个部分，主要通过听、说、看、读等活动引入
单元主题，帮助你们掌握与主题相关的语言和文化基础知识，激发你们进一步探索单元主
题的兴趣。
接下来是“探索”板块。该板块包括思维技能（Thinking Skills）、阅读策略
（Reading Strategies）、主题阅读（Theme Reading）和语法应用（Grammar in
Use）四个部分。思维技能和阅读策略以专项训练的方式进行，并在主题阅读活动中复现。
主题阅读通过一个语篇和多个紧密相连的活动引导你们从语言、文化、思维、策略等不同
视角对单元主题进行探索。语法应用分为词法和句法应用，帮助你们在梳理语法规则的同
时，进一步对单元主题进行探索。
之后是“拓展”板块。该板块包括口头交际（Oral Communication）和以读促写
（Reading for Writing）两个部分，分别以口头产出和笔头产出为目的，采取先听后讨
论、先读后仿写的形式，帮助你们围绕单元主题进行拓展学习。
最后是“收篇”板块。该板块包括项目实践（Project）、复习（Review）和自评
（Self-assessment）三个部分。项目实践强调使用语言做事情，要求你们使用英语并通过
动手做来完成一项小组合作实践项目。复习部分重点复习单元的词汇和语法，同时通过听
说和阅读活动补充或升华单元的主题学习。自评部分以主观题和客观题相结合的方式，帮
助你们对单元主题学习、核心素养达成、活动参与情况、学习计划等进行回顾和反思。
II
Scope and Sequence
Unit
Preparing for the Topic
Let’s Be
Friends!
P 1
Listening & Speaking
Greetings from new friends
Function
Making a new friend
Pronunciation
Alphabet: A to Z
Meet My
Family!
P 19
Listening & Speaking
Kangkang’s family members
Function
A photo of Xiao Ya’s family
Pronunciation
Phonetic symbols (/eɪ/ /æ/ /i/ /e/ /p/ /b/ /t/
/d/ /k/ /G/)
Our Colorful
School Life
P 37
Listening & Speaking
Subjects and timetables
Function
Ways of coming to school
Pronunciation
Phonetic symbols (/aI/ /I/ /f/ /v/ /s/ /z/ /h/ /r/)
& Intonation
1
2
3
III
Exploring the Topic
Developing
the Topic
Wrapping Up
the Topic
Thinking Skills
Describing a person
Reading Strategies
Predicting from pictures
Theme Reading
Kangkang and his friends
Grammar in Use
Personal pronouns (subjective case)
The simple present tense (Ⅰ)
Oral Communication
Guessing who he/she is
Reading for Writing
Introducing yourself
and your friend
Project
Making a name card of
your best friend
Review
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills
Organizing ideas
Reading Strategies
Skimming
Theme Reading
Family time
Grammar in Use
Possessive pronouns
The simple present tense (Ⅱ)
Oral Communication
Talking about your
family
Reading for Writing
Introducing your family
Project
Making your family
album
Review
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills
Identifying the main idea and details
Reading Strategies
Scanning
Theme Reading
Kangkang’s school life
Grammar in Use
Countable nouns
There be ...
Oral Communication
Talking about things
lost and found
Reading for Writing
Writing about your
school life
Project
Designing a web page
of your school
Review
Self-assessment
IV
Scope and Sequence
Unit
Preparing for the Topic
Fun in the
Sun!
P 55
Listening & Speaking
Different seasons, different activities
Function
A phone call invitation
Pronunciation
Phonetic symbols (/9/ /D/ /7/ /u/ // /l/ /m/
/n/ /M/) & Intonation
Love Mother
Nature!
P 73
Listening & Speaking
Different landforms, different climates
Function
Facts about deserts
Pronunciation
Phonetic symbols (// // // /9/ /F/ // /ts/
/dz/ /w/ /j/) & Liaison
Celebrating
the Big Days
P 91
Listening & Speaking
Traditional Chinese festivals
Function
Tomb-sweeping Day
Pronunciation
Phonetic symbols (/a/ /I/ /I9/ /e9/ /9/ /tr/
/dr/ // /E/ /t/ /dE/) & Liaison
Notes to the Text P 109 Grammar P 116 Tapescripts P 118
4
5
6
Appendices
V
Exploring the Topic
Developing
the Topic
Wrapping Up
the Topic
Thinking Skills
Identifying setting
Reading Strategies
Summarizing
Theme Reading
A football game
Grammar in Use
Personal pronouns (objective case)
The present continuous tense
Oral Communication
Talking about
traditional Chinese
sports
Reading for Writing
Writing about your
favorite sport
Project
Making a survey of
sports activities
Review
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills
Comparing and contrasting
Reading Strategies
Guessing word meaning through pictures
Theme Reading
Rainforests and deserts
Grammar in Use
Articles
can/can’t
Oral Communication
Talking about the
importance of plants
and animals
Reading for Writing
Writing about your
hometown
Project
Making a class booklet
about nature
Review
Self-assessment
Thinking Skills
Identifying plot
Reading Strategies
Making connections
Theme Reading
Celebrating the Spring Festival
Grammar in Use
Ordinal numbers
The simple present tense & The present
continuous tense
Oral Communication
Talking about holidays
Reading for Writing
Writing about your
favorite festival
Project
Making a poster of a
traditional festival
Review
Self-assessment
Pronunciation Skills P 123 Words in Each Unit P 125 Vocabulary P 139 Useful Expressions in Each Unit P 153
Attached Word List P 156 English Names P 160 Names of Places P 160
Big Question: What’
s your friend like?
In this unit, you will learn to:
introduce your friends.
greet your friends in a proper way.
use a thinking map to describe a person.
predict the main idea of a text from pictures.
make a name card of your best friend.
UNIT
Let
Let’s’s Be Friends!
Be Friends!
1
UNIT 1
2
A. Match the responses (a–e) with the greetings in the picture at the top
of the next page.
C. Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
and practice with your partner.
B. Read the sentences and fill in the blanks with the names in the picture.
1. I am __________________. I like science.
2. My name is __________________. I like reading.
3. I’m __________________. I love hiking.
4. I am __________________. I enjoy playing football.
5. My name’s __________________. I like singing.
What’s your name, please?
What do you like?
My name is Li Xiang.
I like hiking.
Hello, Miss Wang.
Hello! I’m Miss Wang.
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
1
Activity 1
Listening & Speaking
Greetings from new friends
c. Good morning!
a. Hello!
b. Nice to meet you, too.
e. How do you do?
d. I’m fine.
UNIT 1
3
Listen to the conversation and circle the correct information
on the name card.
Pair work. Make your name card and introduce yourself to
your partner.
I’m Lingling.
How do you
do?
My name is Li
Xiang. How
are you?
My name’s
Xiao Ya. Nice
to meet you.
Hello！
I’m Wang
Junfeng.
Good morning!
I am Kangkang.
Name: Zhao Lin/Zhang Li
Likes: Singing/Dancing
Student Number:
202474018/202463159
Activity 2
Activity 3
Name: _________________________________
Likes: __________________________________
Student Number: _________________________
UNIT 1
4
Read the numbers aloud. Pay attention to the red letters.
Listen and read, and then complete the name cards.
Group work. Make up a new conversation to introduce your
group members to each other.
eleven twelve thirteen fourteen fifteen
sixteen seventeen eighteen nineteen twenty
12
16
18
17
20
15
14
13
19
Listen to the conversation and put the pictures in order.
11
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 4
Lulu: Hi, Kangkang!
Kangkang: Hi, Lulu! This is Xiao Ya. Xiao Ya, this is Lulu.
Lulu: Nice to meet you, Xiao Ya.
Xiao Ya: Nice to meet you, too. Where are you from?
Lulu: I’m from Beijing. And you?
Xiao Ya: I am from Tianjin.
Lulu: I’m in Class 6, Grade 7. Which class are you in?
Xiao Ya: I’m in Class 6, Grade 7, too. We are classmates.
Lulu: I’m twelve. How old are you?
Xiao Ya: I’m thirteen years old. See you.
Lulu: See you.
Name: Lulu
Name: Xiao Ya
Function
Making a new friend
City: _____________
Class: ____________
Age: ______________
City: _____________
Class: ____________
Age: ______________
UNIT 1
5
Listen, repeat and write.
Listen to the song and fill in the blanks with correct letters.
Listen and number the letters you hear, and then write
down their missing capital letters or small letters.
1 1 5 5 6 6 5 - 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 -
A B C D E
G, H I
K L M N,
5 5 4 4 3 3 2 - 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 -
O P
and R S T,
V W X Y
.
1 1 5 5 6 6 5 - 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 -
2
4
1= C
T
h
e
A
B
C
S
o
ng
T
h
e
A
B
C
S
o
ng
Pronunciation
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Singing English
songs is a good
way to learn English.
TIPS
Hap-py, hap-py we shall be, when we learn our
.
Alphabet: A to Z
UNIT 1
6
Describing a person
Read the text and learn to describe a person.
Read the text and complete the thinking map.
Pair work. Draw a thinking map about yourself, and then make
a self-introduction to your partner. The following words may help you.
Exploring the Topic
Thinking Skills
UNIT
1
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Looks
tall short strong thin
Likes
reading running drawing cooking singing
Character
kind friendly nice helpful quiet
When you describe a person, you can introduce the person’s name, age, looks, likes,
character, etc.
My name is Kangkang.
I’m 12 years old. I’m
tall. I’m friendly and I
like science.
I am Li Mei. I’m from
China. I am thirteen years
old. I’m in Class Three,
Grade Seven. I am kind. I
like drawing.
Kangkang
12
friendly
tall
likes science
UNIT 1
7
Predicting from pictures
Look at the pictures and predict what you are going to read
about. Tick (
) the correct answer.
Read the text and check your prediction.
We all need friends. Friends can be old. Friends can be young. Friends can be tall.
Friends can be short. Friends play together and help each other.
My prediction is
right
wrong.
My prediction is
right
wrong.
The text may be about ____________________.
friends
classmates
Activity 2
Activity 3
Activity 1
Look at the picture of Li Xiang
and predict what the text may be about,
and then read the text and check your
prediction.
This is my friend, Jim White. He is from
Canada. He is 13 years old. He is tall and
strong. He likes playing football. We often
play football together.
The text may be about Li Xiang’s ___________.
Before you read a text, you can look at the pictures first and predict what the text is about.
Reading Strategies
In English, the first name
is given name, and the
last name is family name. But in
Chinese, family name comes first.
TIPS
UNIT 1
8
Look at the picture and predict what the text may be about.
Pair work. Ask and answer the questions about your best friend.
The sentences in the box may help you.
The text may be about
___________________.
— Who is your best friend? — My best friend is ...
— Where is he/she from? — He/She is from ...
— Which class is he/she in? — He/She is in ...
— What does he/she like? — He/She likes ...
Hi, I’m Kangkang. I’m from Beijing. I’m in Class Six, Grade Seven. I’m
twelve. I like science. Here are my friends.
Xiao Ya is from Tianjin. She’s in Class Six, too. She is kind and cute.
She likes singing and playing the guitar.
Li Xiang is from Beijing, too. He is in Class Three, Grade Seven. He is
tall and strong. He likes hiking.
Lingling is my classmate. She’s friendly and quiet. She likes reading.
We are all new here, and we are very happy to meet each other at the
new school!
Activity 1
Activity 2
Theme Reading
Kangkang and his friends
UNIT 1
9
Read the text and mark T (True) or F (False).
Read the text again and draw thinking maps about Kangkang
and his friends.
Group work. Ask and answer questions about Kangkang and
his friends based on Activity 4, and then introduce them in your group.
1. Xiao Ya likes music.
2. Li Xiang is from Tianjin.
3. Lingling and Kangkang are classmates.
4. Kangkang and Li Xiang like hiking.
( )
( )
( )
( )
You may begin like this:
Kangkang has three friends. They are ... Xiao Ya is ...
Activity 3
Activity 4
Activity 5
UNIT 1
10
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
the personal pronouns in bold.
Fill in the blanks with the correct personal pronouns.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct personal
pronouns.
Hello! I am Lingling.
We are good friends.
You are in Class 6.
They are from China.
She is Xiao Ya.
It is a cute dog and
has two big ears.
He is 12 years old.
1. This is a cat. ________ is a little black cat.
2. ________ am in Class One, Grade Seven.
3. Meimei and I are in Class One, Grade Seven. ________ are classmates.
4. Xiao Ya and Meimei are good friends. ________ like listening to music.
5. Wang Junfeng is tall and strong. ________ likes playing football.
This is my friend, Sarah Hill. _________ is from America. _________ is lovely.
Sarah has a brother, Tom Hill. _________ is very tall. _________ likes singing
and dancing. _________ like dancing, too. _________ often dance together.
Personal pronouns (subjective case)
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Grammar in Use
UNIT 1
11
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to the usage
of the verb be.
Pair work. Complete the sentences, and then share them with
your partner.
The simple present tense (I)
Hello! My name is Li Mei. What’s your name?
Yes, I am. We
are classmates.
Is that boy our
classmate, too?
Negative
I am not ...
I’m not ...
He/She/It is not ...
He/She/It isn’t ...
We/You/They are not ... We/You/They aren’t ...
Positive
I am ...
I’m ...
He/She/It is ...
He/She/It’s ...
We/You/They are ... We/You/They’re ...
Question
Short Answer
Am
I ...?
Yes,
you ____.
No,
you are not (you ____).
Is
he/she/it ...?
he/she/it ____.
he/she/it is not (he/she/it ____).
Are we/you/they ...?
you/we/they ____.
you/we/they are not
(you/we/they ____).
Complete the tables and learn how to use the verb be.
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Yourself
1.(Name) I _______________________ .
2.(Age) I _______________________ .
3.(Class) I _______________________ .
4.(Home) I _______________________ .
Your Friend
1.(Name) He/She ________________ .
2.(Age) He/She _________________ .
3.(Class) He/She ________________ .
4.(Home) He/She ________________ .
No, he isn’t. He is in Class One.
Hi! I am Li Xiang. Are you in Class Three?
You may begin like this:
He/She is from ...
He/She is ... years old.
He/She is a ... boy/girl.
He/She likes ...
UNIT 1
12
A. Listen to the conversation and match
the following information.
B. Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Take turns to introduce a
member in your group, and then let other members
guess who he/she is.
Li Ming
Meimei
Lin Hua
Class Three
Class Six
Class Seven
swimming
running
cooking
Li Ming is from __________. He is __________ years old.
Meimei is from Tianjin. She is __________ years old.
Lin Hua is from __________. He is __________ years old.
Developing the Topic
UNIT
1
Activity 2
Activity 1
Oral Communication
Guessing who he/she is
Set a purpose
before you listen,
i.e. listening for names,
places, numbers, etc.
TIPS
UNIT 1
12
UNIT 1
13
Xiao Ya
Read the text and complete the thinking map.
Draw a thinking map about yourself and your friend.
Introducing yourself and
your friend
My Friend and I
Hi, everyone! My name is Lingling. I have a good
friend. Her name is Xiao Ya.
I’m from Beijing. I’m in Class Six, Grade Seven. I’m
quiet and friendly. Xiao Ya is from Tianjin. She is my
classmate. She is a beautiful and lovely girl.
I like drawing pictures and reading books. Xiao Ya
likes singing and listening to music. We also do many
things together, such as swimming and running.
Xiao Ya is a great friend! I enjoy the time with her.
Title
Beginning
Body
End
• Who
• Likes
Activity 2
Activity 1
Lingling
Reading for Writing
Class Six,
Grade Seven
UNIT 1
14
Draft your essay about yourself and your friend.
Make your final draft in your exercise book.
Invite your partner to rate your final draft. Write 1 (more improvements
needed), 2 (fair), 3 (good), or 4 (excellent) for the ratings.
_________________________
My name is _____________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ .
__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________ .
I like ____________________________________________________ .
We ______________________________________________________ .
_______ is a great friend! We ____________________________ .
Activity 4
Activity 3
Activity 5
Title
Beginning
End
Body
• Who
• Likes
How well can you ____________________?
Partner’s
rating
express your view of making friends
use the thinking skill of describing a person
introduce your friend to others
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use the simple present tense
use punctuation
spell the words
UNIT 1
15
Read the name card and answer the questions.
Group work. Design a name card of your best friend and draw
a picture of him or her.
Group work. Introduce your best friend in your group based on
Activity 2, and then choose the best designer to report to the class.
Making a name card of your best friend
1. What do you know from the name card?
2. Which girl in the picture is Liu Mei?
This is my best friend … He/She is …
Name: Liu Mei
Age: 12
Home: Guangming Village
Likes: Drawing
Looks/Character: A tall girl
My Best Friend
Wrapping Up the Topic
Project
UNIT
1
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Name: ______________________________
Age: ________________________________
Home: ______________________________
Likes: ________________________________
Looks/Character: ____________________
My Best Friend
UNIT 1
16
Group work. Listen to the text and complete the name cards,
and then introduce the students to your class.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
friendly happy classmate quiet
Review
Activity 2
Activity 1
My name is Yangyang. I’m from Shijiazhuang. Lingling
is my best friend at school. She is from Beijing. She is my
___________. Lingling is a ____________ girl. She doesn’t talk
much, but she likes to help others. She is really ____________
and kind. We love reading.
I’m ____________ to be friends with her and I enjoy the time
with her.
Name: Yang Guang
City: ____________
Likes: Reading
Name: Xiao Ming
City: _____________
Likes: ____________
Name: Chen Lili
City: _______________
Likes: ______________
Name: Xiaoxiao
City:
Likes: ____________
Beijing
UNIT 1
17
Read and write the
following sentences. Pay attention
to the underlined letters.
Read the text and complete it with am/is/are(not).
My name _______ Liu Yang. I _______ 13 years old. I’m from Xi’an. Li Ming
_______ my best friend. He _______ from Xi’an. He is from Beijing. He’s 13
years old. Li Ming and I _______ in Grade Seven, but we _______ in different
classes. He _______ kind. He likes playing football and swimming.
1. I am Kangkang and I’
m from Beijing.
2. Nice to meet you.
3. Mr. Smith is from Canada.
4. Li Qiao is from Chongqing.
5. Are you in Class Four, Grade Seven?
Activity 3
Activity 4
They begin with capital letters:
• the first word of a sentence;
• Mr., Mrs., Ms., Miss and I;
• names of people, cities, countries, etc.
TIPS
UNIT 1
18
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of making friends.
I enjoy making new friends and I can describe their __________
____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can spell the 26 letters.
I can use the vocabulary for/of greetings and hobbies.
I can use the personal pronouns and simple present tense.
I can greet my friends in a proper way.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities?
I can talk about myself and my new friends.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can introduce a member in my group.
I can write about myself and my friends.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can use a thinking map to describe a person.
I can predict the main idea of a text from pictures.
I can work with my partners in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make name cards with my partners.
I can report our project to the class.
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Big Question: What makes a family?
In this unit, you will learn to:
introduce your family.
understand family differences.
use a thinking map to organize ideas.
use the reading strategy of skimming.
make your family album.
UNIT
Meet My Family!
Meet My Family!
2
UNIT 2
20
B. Read the sentences and tick (
) the correct information.
C. Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
and practice with your partner.
A. Match the words (a–h) with Kangkang’
s family members at the top of
the next page.
Who is this man?
He is my father.
He is a doctor.
No, she isn’t. She
is my cousin.
What does he do?
Is this tall girl your sister?
Activity 1
1. My name is Kangkang. I’m a student/a teacher. I am in Class 6, Grade 7.
2. This man is my father. He always wears a tie. He is a worker/a doctor.
3. My mother is a nurse/a teacher. She likes wearing qipao.
4. My uncle is in a white shirt. He is a bus driver/a worker.
5. That woman in a blue dress is my aunt. She is a nurse/a policewoman.
6. The tall girl in yellow is my sister/cousin. She’s my uncle’s child.
7. Xuanxuan is my little sister/brother. She has a pink toy rabbit.
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
2
b. grandmother
a. grandfather
h. cousin
c. father
Kangkang’s family members
Listening & Speaking
e. uncle
f. aunt
d. mother
g. sister
UNIT 2
21
Listen to the conversation and match Wang Junfeng’s family
members with their jobs.
Pair work. Ask and answer questions about Wang Junfeng’s
family members.
nurse
doctor
teacher
worker
mother
aunt
father
uncle
Activity 2
Activity 3
Kangkang
c. father
My ...
f. aunt
UNIT 2
22
Pair work. Talk about the jobs and the workplaces.
Listen to the conversation and answer the questions.
Listen and read, and then complete the table.
Group work. Talk about your family members, and then make
up a new conversation.
Kangkang: Is this a photo of your family?
Xiao Ya: Yes, it is.
Kangkang: What does your father do?
Xiao Ya: He’s a PE teacher.
Kangkang: Where does he work?
Xiao Ya: He works in our school.
Kangkang: Does he teach us?
Xiao Ya: No, he doesn’t. He teaches Grade Eight.
Kangkang: What does your mother do?
Xiao Ya: She is a worker in a big factory.
Kangkang: Your little sister is so cute and pretty. How old is she?
Xiao Ya: She is only four years old.
1. How many people are there in Xiao Ya’s family?
2. Who are they?
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Activity 4
teacher
factory
nurse
hospital
worker
school
cook
restaurant
Example: ---- Where does a teacher work? ---- A teacher works in a school.
Function
A photo of Xiao Ya’s family
Family Member
Job
Workplace
Xiao Ya’s father
Xiao Ya’s mother
UNIT 2
23
Listen and repeat.
Listen to the chant. Pay attention to the pronunciation of
the colored letters.
Listen and circle the words you hear.
Read the following sounds aloud and spell out the words.
/Geɪt/＿＿＿ /dæd/＿＿＿ /bed/＿＿＿
/pet/＿＿＿ /deɪt/＿＿＿ /bæG/＿＿＿
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 4
Pronunciation
Kate keeps a big pet.
Its name is Ted.
Ted gets a bag. The bag is on his bed.
Ted is a cute cat.
He meets dad at the gate.
take
gate
bag
dad
bed
pet
get
bee
tab
date
Kate
egg
Letter
a
e
p
b
t
d
k
g
Sound
/eI/
/æ/
/i/
/e/
/p/
/b/
/t/
/d/
/k/
/G/
Word
gate
date
at
tab
keep
be
get
beg
pet
tap
bed
beep
Ted
bet
dad
day
Kate
take
bag
egg
The sound of a
word can help
you check your spelling
in English.
TIPS
Phonetic symbols (/eI/ /æ/ /i/ /e/ /p/ /b/ /t/
/d/ /k/ /G/)
UNIT 2
24
Organizing ideas
Look at the pictures and read the text. Learn how to organize ideas.
Read the text and complete the thinking map.
Pair work. Draw a thinking map about your family time and then
talk about it. The following phrases may help you.
I enjoy my time with my family. We eat and talk together. We read and watch TV
together. We do chores together, too.
I’m busy on Saturdays. I play basketball with my father in the morning and help my
mother cook at noon. In the afternoon, my parents and I visit my grandparents.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Exploring the Topic
Thinking Skills
UNIT
2
I’m busy on
Saturdays.
I play basketball
with my father.
I visit my grandparents.
I help my mother cook.
play football read books go to the park go shopping walk the dog
A writer needs to think of some ideas first, and then organize them in a good way.
UNIT 2
25
Read the underlined sentences only and then fill in the blanks.
Read the text and underline the sentences about the main idea
and key points.
Skim the text in Activity 2 again and choose the correct answers.
When you are reading, you can just focus on the main idea and key points to get the
important information quickly.
Maria is from a big family. She lives with her grandparents, parents, uncles,
aunts, brothers, sisters and cousins.
Li Xiang’s family is small. There are three people in his family. They are his
parents and him.
All families are different. Some families are big. Grandparents,
parents and children live together. Most families are small. The
parents live with their children.
1. What is the text about?
A. Big and small families. B. Happy family time. C. Family tree.
2. Which photo shows a small family?
Maria’s family is ____________, and Li Xiang’s family is ____________.
A.
B.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Reading Strategies
Skimming
My name is Kangkang. My mother is a teacher, and my father is a
doctor. They are very busy most of the time. But after work, we do
many things together.
My grandparents don’t live with us. We often visit them on weekends
and have dinner together. We all do something for dinner. My parents
cook the food. My sister helps our grandparents set the table and I clean
up with my father after dinner.
I love my family, and I enjoy my family time.
UNIT 2
26
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about your family time.
Read the text and underline the main idea.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Theme Reading
Family time
UNIT 2
27
Read the text again and mark T (True) or F (False).
Read the text again and complete the thinking map.
1. Kangkang’s parents are busy most of the time.
2. Kangkang lives with his grandparents.
3. Kangkang and his sister set the table.
4. Kangkang’s grandparents cook the dinner.
5. Kangkang and his father clean up after dinner.
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
Activity 3
Activity 4
Group work. Discuss the activities in the pictures and then retell
the text.
Activity 5
They all do something
for dinner.
Kangkang __________
___________________.
Kangkang’s parents
___________________.
Kangkang’s sister and his grandparents
______________________________.
UNIT 2
28
Personal pronoun
(subjective case )
I
_____
he
_____
it
we
you
they
Possessive pronoun
_____
your
_____
her
its
_____
_____
_____
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
the possessive pronouns in bold.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with correct pronouns.
Complete the table with the correct form of the personal pronouns.
Mr. and Mrs. Yang have a happy family. They have two children and a cat. This
is _____ son. _____ name is Yang Guang. He likes swimming and riding _____
bike. Yang Guang has a sister. _____ name is Yang Yu. She is pretty and she likes
dancing. The cat is black. _____ name is Xiaohei.
Possessive pronouns
This is my mother.
She is a teacher.
Kangkang’s aunt
is a policewoman.
She loves her job.
---- Kangkang, your
sister is pretty.
---- Yes, she is.
---- Whose dog is it?
---- It’s my dog. Its
name is Wangcai.
---- Is that man your
teacher?
---- Yes, he is.
I have a happy
family and we enjoy
our family time.
Kangkang’s uncle
is a bus driver. He
loves his job.
Kangkang and his
sister love their
grandparents very
much.
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 2
Grammar in Use
UNIT 2
29
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to the words
in bold.
Complete the tables and learn how to use the simple present tense.
Group work. Read the example and complete the table, and
then make short conversations.
The simple present tense (II)
Positive
I/You/We/They
like
singing.
He/She/It
_____
Negative
I/You/We/They
don’t like
singing.
He/She/It
_____
Question
Short answer
Do I/you/we/they
like
singing?
Yes,
you/I/we/they ____.
No,
you/I/we/they don’t.
___
he/she/it
he/she/it
does.
he/she/it
____.
Yes, he does. He plays it very well.
Example:
---- Does Li Xiang like swimming? ---- Yes, he does.
---- Do you like swimming? ---- Yes, I do./No, I don’t.
---- What do you like? ---- I like dancing.
Activity 2
Activity 3
Activity 1
Yes, I do. My brother likes singing, too.
Activity
Li Xiang
Xiao Ya
Lingling and
Li Mei
Yourself
swimming
playing football
running
√
√
√
√
√
×
×
×
×
Michael, do you like singing?
Does he like playing the guitar?
UNIT 2
30
A. Listen to the conversation and tick (
) Lingling’
s family photo.
B. Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Pair work. Introduce your family to your partner. The questions
in the box may help you.
Lingling has a happy family. Her father is a ___________, and her mother is a
policewoman. Lingling and her brother often help their parents do ___________.
Lingling helps her father do the ___________. Her brother helps their mother
___________. On weekends, Lingling’s family visit her grandparents. They eat
and ___________ together.
1. Do you have a big or a small family?
2. Who are they in your family?
3. What do they do?
4. What do your family often do together?
You may begin like this:
I have a big/small family. There are ... in my family ... My mother is ... My father is ...
Activity 1
Activity 2
Developing the Topic
UNIT
2
Oral Communication
Talking about your family
You can use pictures
to help introduce
your family.
TIPS
UNIT 2
31
Read the text and complete the thinking map.
Draw a thinking map about your family activities.
My Family
Hello, my name is Li Xiang. I’m twelve. Let me
tell you about my family.
There are three people in my family. They are my
father, my mother and me. My father is a doctor.
My mother is a nurse.
My family do many things together. We often
do sports in the afternoon, such as running and
swimming. Sometimes, we watch films at home.
On weekends, we often visit my grandparents.
I love my family.
Title
Beginning
Body
End
• Family members
• Family activities
Activity 1
Activity 2
Introducing your family
My family do many
things together.
Reading for Writing
UNIT 2
32
Draft your essay about your family.
Make your final draft in your exercise book.
_________________
Hello! My name is _____________________________ . I’m
_______________ . Let me ____________________________ .
____________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________ .
I ____________________________________ .
Activity 3
Activity 4
Activity 5
Title
Beginning
End
Body
• Family members
• Family activities
How well can you ____________________ ?
Partner’s
rating
express your view of family love
introduce your family
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use the simple present tense
use punctuation
spell the words
Invite your partner to rate your final draft. Write 1 (more improvements
needed), 2 (fair), 3 (good), or 4 (excellent) for the ratings.
UNIT 2
33
Look at the photos in Liu Mei’s family album and answer the
questions.
Group work. Introduce some photos of your family to your
group, and then make a family photo album.
Talk about your family photo album.
Making your family album
1. Who are the members in Liu Mei’s family?
2. What are Liu Mei’s family activities?
Here are my family photos. They are really great ...
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Wrapping Up the Topic
Project
UNIT
2
Put some photos here.
My Family Activities
————————————
————————————
————————————
————————————
————————————
UNIT 2
34
Look at the pictures and complete the sentences with the
correct form of the phrases.
Pair work. Complete the conversation with the correct form
of the given words, and then act it out with your partner.
Listen to the monolog and match the people’
s names with
the cities, and then listen again and write down their jobs.
1. I like ____________ my little sister after school.
2. My uncle Lin Feng ____________ in a middle school.
3. The girl _________________ every day.
4. My grandparents don’t ______________ us, but we visit them on weekends.
5. ----- Does she often help her mother ____________ at home?
----- Yes, she does.
Fuzhou
Shenzhen
Nanjing
Beijing
Li Jun
Wang Jing
Zhang Tao
Wang Linlin
_________
_________
_________
_________
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
study hard
live with
play with
Review
teach math
do chores
Xiaoxiao: Li Ming, who is the girl in the photo?
Li Ming: She is my big sister.
Xiaoxiao: She ______ (look) nice in white. What _______ she _______ (do)?
Li Ming: She is a nurse.
Xiaoxiao: Does she _______ (work) in a hospital?
Li Ming: No, she _______ (not work) in a hospital. She _______ (look)
after the old in an old people’s home.
Xiaoxiao: I see. She is very kind.
UNIT 2
35
A. Skim the text and write a proper title for the text.
Activity 4
My name is Lin Hua. I am twelve
years old. I’m a student in Grade
Seven.
This is my family. We live in
Zhengzhou. My father is a doctor.
He works in a hospital. My
mother is a teacher. She teaches
in a high school. I have a sister,
Yaoyao. She is six years old. She
likes playing with Kitty. Kitty is a cute cat. My grandparents live with us.
They help a lot in looking after the family.
I love my family!
1. Where does Lin Hua live?
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. What does his father do?
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Where does his mother work?
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. What other things do you know about Lin Hua’s family?
____________________________________________________________________________
B. Read the text again and answer the questions.
My ________________
UNIT 2
36
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of introducing my family.
I enjoy my family time, and we often _____________________
_____________________________________________together.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can say the vowel and consonant sounds.
I can use the vocabulary for/of family.
I can use the possessive pronouns and simple present tense.
I can describe different kinds of families.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities?
I can talk about my family members and their jobs.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can introduce my family to my classmates.
I can write about my family members and family activities.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can use a thinking map to organize ideas.
I can use skimming strategy in reading.
I can work with my partners in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make family album with my partners.
I can report our project to the class.
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Big Question: What is your school life like?
In this unit, you will learn to:
introduce your school life.
understand the school life in different cultures.
use a thinking map to identify the main idea
and details.
use the reading strategy of scanning.
design a web page of your school.
UNIT
Our Colorful School Life
Our Colorful School Life
3
UNIT 3
38
A. Match the subjects (a–h) with the pictures at the top of the next page.
It’s eight o’clock.
What time is it now?
It’s time for our Chinese class.
B. Look at the timetable and write the subjects on the lines.
C. Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
and practice with your partner.
Activity 1
a. biology
e. geography
b. Chinese
f. art
c. math
g. history
d. PE
h. computer science
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
3
The _______ class
begins at 8 o’clock.
It’s ten twenty. We’re at
the _______ class.
It’s half past eleven.
The _______ class is over.
It’s a quarter to three.
We all like the _______ class.
Wednesday
8:00 -- 8:40 Chinese
8:50 -- 9:30 Math
10:00 -- 10:40 Music
10:50 -- 11:30 Art
14:30 -- 15:10 PE
15:20 -- 16:00 English
Morning
Afternoon
Subjects and timetables
Listening & Speaking
UNIT 3
39
Listen to the conversation and fill in the blanks.
Pair work. Talk about your favorite subject and the class
timetable.
I like ________ best. It’s at ________
on Thursday afternoon.
It’s ________. I have a _____________ class
at 10:30. It’s my favorite subject.
Activity 2
Activity 3
UNIT 3
40
Look at the pictures and match them with the phrases.
Listen to the conversation and circle the correct answer.
Group work. Talk about how you come to school by using
adverbs of frequency.
Xiao Ya: Hi, Kangkang. How do you usually come to school?
Kangkang: My home is not very far, so I usually come here on foot, sometimes
by bike. How about you, Xiao Ya?
Xiao Ya: I live far from school. I never come to school on foot. I often take
the underground. What about you, Lulu?
Lulu: I seldom take the underground. There are no underground stops near
my home. I always come to school by bus.
Kangkang: What’s the time now?
Lulu: It’s 7:55. It’s time for class. Let’s go!
They are talking about the way of going to school/the underground stop.
1. Kangkang usually comes to school on foot.
2. Kangkang __________ comes to school by bike.
3. Xiao Ya __________ comes to school on foot.
4. Xiao Ya __________ comes to school by underground.
5. Lulu __________ comes to school by underground.
6. Lulu __________ comes to school by bus.
A. by underground
B. by bike
C. by plane
D. on foot
E . by car
F . by train
G. by ship
H. by bus
I . by boat
A
Activity 1
Activity 2
Listen and read, and then fill in the blanks with adverbs of
frequency.
Activity 3
Activity 4
Adverbs of
frequency show
how often something
happens. They usually
come before the notional
verbs.
TIPS
Function
Ways of coming to school
Phonetic symbols (/aI/ /I/ /f/ /v/ /s/ /z/ /h/ /r/ )
& Intonation
UNIT 3
41
Listen and repeat.
Listen to the text. Pay attention to the pronunciation of the
colored letters.
Read the following sounds aloud and spell the words.
Listen and repeat the following sentences aloud. Pay attention
to the rising tones ( ) and the falling tones ( ).
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 4
1. There are pens, books and a ruler in my schoolbag.
2. We usually go to the zoo by bus, by car or by underground.
3. We study Chinese, English and many other subjects.
Pronunciation
/baɪk/＿＿＿ /sɪt/＿＿＿ /faɪv/＿＿＿ /bɪG/＿＿＿
/hɪt/＿＿＿ /kaɪt/＿＿＿ /kɪd/＿＿＿ /raɪz/＿＿＿
Letter
i
f
v
s
z
h
r
Sound
/aI/
/I/
/f/
/v/
/s/
/z/
/z/
/h/
/r/
Word
bike
kite
kid
big
fine
gift
give
five
sit
desk
his
has
Zaki
zip
he
hit
ride
rise
Zaki has a bike.
A nice big bike.
He sees the sun rise.
And he goes outside.
Today, he has a math class.
He sits and works hard.
In a list, we
use a rising
tone for each item
before the last one,
and a falling tone for
the last one.
TIPS
UNIT 3
42
Identifying the main idea and details
Look at the picture and read the text. Learn how to identify the
main idea and details.
Read the text and complete the main idea and detail chart.
Our School Library
We have a big
school library.
It is a new
building with
two floors.
There are a
lot of books
in it.
My school is very beautiful. There is a beautiful teaching building. It has five
floors. The playground is big, and it is also very beautiful. Next to the playground,
there is a small garden. There are many beautiful flowers in it.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Pair work. Talk about your school by using a main idea and detail
chart. The following words may help you.
beautiful clean tidy tall bright quiet colorful
Activity 3
Exploring the Topic
UNIT
3
Thinking Skills
The main idea is what the text is all about. Details are used to support or tell more
about the main idea.
UNIT 3
43
Read the question first and scan the poster for the answer.
Read the poster again and answer the questions.
Read the questions first and scan the text for the answers.
Question: What time does the English club open?
1. Where does the girl go on Fridays?
2. What does the boy often do at the swimming club?
1. Where is the English club?
2. What activities are there in the English club?
The question is
about time.
The time is here.
The boy likes sports. He goes to the swimming club at
4:30 every Tuesday afternoon. He plays water games
with his friends at the club.
The girl loves art. Every Friday, she goes
to the art club to draw pictures there.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Scanning
Reading Strategies
When you are reading, you can go through the text quickly and only search for the
information you need.
I’m Kangkang and I study at a middle school in Beijing. Our school life is
fun and colorful.
On the morning of every Monday, we raise the national flag. We start the first
class at 8:00 a.m. every day. We study Chinese, English, math, science and
many other subjects. My favorite class is PE. Every afternoon, we have one
PE class on the playground.
There are many student clubs in our school. We can make friends with other
students there. We have different activities in the clubs after school. I enjoy
singing and playing the guitar in the music club.
I really love going to school.
UNIT 3
44
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about the school
activities in the pictures.
Read the text and underline Kangkang’s activities on Monday.
Read the text again and answer the questions.
1. How is Kangkang’s school life?
2. What time does the first class begin?
3. Where does Kangkang have PE classes?
4. What does Kangkang do in the music club?
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Theme Reading
Kangkang’s school life
UNIT 3
45
Complete the main idea and detail chart according to the text.
Look at the pictures and choose the correct words to complete
the phrases, and then fill in the blanks with the correct form of the phrases.
1. Kangkang likes _______________ and answering questions in class.
2. Kangkang often _______________ with Wang Junfeng after class.
3. Kangkang ____________________ and singing songs.
4. Kangkang is friendly and he ___________________ many students in different
school clubs.
Activity 5
Activity 4
______ basketball
______ playing the
guitar
______ his hand
______ friends
with ...
Main idea:
Our school life is _______________________.
Detail:
On Monday mornings,
we ________________
___________________
___________________
___________________.
Detail:
We start our first class
at ________ and study
many subjects, such
as ________________.
We have __________.
Detail:
After school, we have
___________________
___________________
___________________
__________________.
raise
play
enjoy
make
UNIT 3
46
Singular
watch
glass
dish
tomato
toy
country
half
Plural
Complete the table and learn how to form the plural form of
countable nouns.
Read the text and tick (
) the correct words.
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
the nouns in bold.
Mike is an American boy. At an American school, (student/students) meet
their class teachers at the start of the (day/days). During the day, they go to
different (classroom/classrooms) for different subjects. After school, they
take part in club (activity/activities). Mike is in the science (club/clubs). At
the club, he makes (friends/friend) with students from America and other
(country/countries).
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
My sister likes
reading books.
My art teacher likes
taking photos.
There are two boxes
in the boy’s hands.
We have many different
school activities.
There are three school
buses in our school.
There are two knives
on the table.
Grammar in Use
Countable nouns
UNIT 3
47
Singular noun
Plural noun
Positive
There ____ (There’s) ...
There ____ (There’re) ...
Negative
There ____ (There isn’t) ...
There ____ (There aren’t) ...
Question
____ there a/an/any ... ?
____ there any ... ?
Short answer
Yes, there ____.
Yes, there ____.
No, there ____.
No, there ____.
Complete the table and learn how to use there be.
Pair work. Look at the picture of a classroom, and then follow
the example to ask and answer questions with there be.
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to there be.
Example:
---- What’s in the classroom?
---- There is a blackboard and some desks.
---- Are there any chairs in the classroom?
---- Yes, there are.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
There be ...
Are there any toys in the small boxes?
Is there any water in the bottles?
What’s in the big box?
There are some bottles in it.
No, there isn’t. But there is some juice.
Yes, there are.
UNIT 3
48
A. Match the words with the objects in the picture, and then listen to
the conversation and circle the words you hear.
B. Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Talk about the things in the Lost and Found and
then make a conversation.
Zhou Hua can’t find his schoolbag. The schoolbag is ________. There is a name card
and a ping-pong ball in it. And there are also ________ books in the schoolbag. One
is a ________ book and the other is a science book. Miss Wang finds the schoolbag
________ the computer.
A: Can I help you?
B: Yes. I can’t find my ...
A: What’s your name?
B: ...
A: What color is your ... ?
B: It’s ...
…
Activity 2
Activity 1
Developing the Topic
UNIT
3
1. pencils
2. books
3. a desk
4. a name card
5. a ruler
6. a schoolbag
7. a ping-pong ball
8. a computer
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
Oral Communication
Talking about things lost and
found
You may begin like this:
UNIT 3
49
Read the text and complete the main idea and detail chart.
Draw a main idea and detail chart about your school life.
Writing about your school life
My School Life
I am a middle school student, and my school life is
colorful.
We usually start our day at 8:00 a.m., and our classes
end at 4:00 p.m. We learn many different subjects
like Chinese, math, science, history and English.
After school, we play games. There are also many
interesting after-school activities. We can join the
clubs, play sports or go to the library.
I really love my school life!
• School time
• Subjects
• After-school activities
Activity 2
Activity 1
Title
Beginning
Body
End
Reading for Writing
Main idea:
My middle school life is _________________________.
Detail:
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
_______________.
Detail:
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
_______________.
Detail:
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
_______________.
UNIT 3
50
Draft your essay about your school life.
Make your final draft in your exercise book.
_________________________
I go to school ____________. My middle school life is ____
__________________.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________.
I really ______________________________________ !
Activity 3
Activity 4
Activity 5
Title
Beginning
Body
End
• School time
• Subjects
• After-school
activities
How well can you ____________________ ?
Partner’s
rating
express your love for school life
use the thinking skill of organizing the main idea and details
introduce your school life
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use there be …
use punctuation
spell the words
Invite your partner to rate your final draft. Write 1 (more improvements
needed), 2 (fair), 3 (good), or 4 (excellent) for the ratings.
UNIT 3
51
Read the web page of Greenland Middle School, and then answer
the questions.
Group work. Make a web page of your school.
Share your web page with your classmates.
1. Who made the web page?
2. What do you know about Greenland Middle School?
Here is the web page of our school ...
Our school is in Greenland city. It has a history of 32 years. There are 3 grades,
18 classes, and about 40 teachers in our school now. Students learn English,
math, Chinese, science, PE and some other subjects. And there are lots of clubs
in our school, such as art club, sports club and music club! Students can learn a
lot and have great fun here.
Welcome to find out more about our school!
Greenland Middle School
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Wrapping Up the Topic
Project
UNIT
3
Home
Jim Green Allen Bruce
By
Designing a web page of your school
About Us Subjects Students and Teachers Clubs
___________ Middle School
Home
By __________________________
About Us Subjects Students and Teachers Clubs
UNIT 3
52
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct form of there be.
Pair work. Listen to the conversation and complete the cards,
and then introduce Lingling and Yang Peng.
Look at the pictures and complete the sentences.
1. Li Mei wants to know more about the past. Her favorite subject is _________.
2. I often play _________ with my friends on the _________.
3. Li Ming is in the music club and he likes playing the _________.
4. Look! Our classroom is clean and _________.
5. Jane is in the _________ club because she likes drawing.
Hello! I’m Tiantian. I love my school very much. It is very beautiful. ____________
six buildings and many trees in my school. The teaching building is tall. _________
_______ twenty-five rooms in it. ____________ also a big science building. We
often have science classes in it. Next to the science building, ____________ a
playground. And we have a tidy and quiet library, too. ____________ lots of books
in it. We usually read books there after school.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Review
Lingling: _________ Club
Yang Peng: PE Club
How often: Every Friday
Time: ____________
Favorite: ____________
How often: ____________
Time: 4:00
Favorite: ____________
UNIT 3
53
1. You can meet the writers in the (classroom/school library).
2. The reading activity starts at (1:00 p.m./3:00 p.m.).
3. You can go to the science club every (Wednesday/Friday).
4. You can learn about film-making from (the science books/Mr. Zhang).
Activity 4 Read the posters and circle the correct answers.
Do You Want to Make a Film?
Meet Mr. Zhang at the Science Club.
Learn more about f ilm-making.
Time: 1:00 p.m. -- 3:00 p.m. every Friday
Place: Science Building
Come and Meet the Writers !
Read their books.
Ask them some questions.
Place: School Library
Time: 1:00 p.m. on Wednesday
All are welcome!
UNIT 3
54
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of school life.
I enjoy many subjects and activities at school, such as _________
_____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can say the vowel and consonant sounds.
I can use the vocabulary for/of school subjects and activities.
I can use the countable nouns and there be.
I can understand the school life in different cultures.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities?
I can talk about subjects and timetables.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can discuss things lost and found with my partners.
I can write about my school life.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can identify the main idea and details.
I can use the scanning strategy in reading.
I can work with my partners in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can design a web page of my school with my partners.
I can report our project to the class.
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Big Question: What do you often do outdoors?
In this unit, you will learn to:
introduce your daily activities.
understand the sports in different countries.
use a chart to describe the setting of an event.
use the reading strategy of summarizing.
make a survey of sports activities.
UNIT
Fun in the Sun!
Fun in the Sun!
4
UNIT 4
56
B. Read the sentences and complete them with the words above.
C. Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
and practice with your partner.
It’s cool.
1. My parents usually take us to go hiking on _______ weekends.
2. It’s very _______ today. My little brother is swimming now.
3. It’s snowing, but it’s not very _______. Let’s go and make a snowman.
4. It’s sunny and _______ today. Xiaoxiao’s family are having a picnic in the park.
What’s the weather like in autumn?
I like hiking with my family.
What do you like doing in autumn?
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
4
Activity 1
A. Match the seasons with the pictures (1–4) at the top of the next page,
and then connect each season with its suitable weather.
Different seasons, different
activities
Listening & Speaking
spring
summer
autumn
winter
hot
cool
cold
warm
UNIT 4
57
Listen to the conversation and choose the correct answers.
Pair work. Talk about what you like doing in different seasons.
1. Which season does Miss Wang like best?
A. Spring. B. Summer. C. Autumn.
2. Why does Miss Wang like that season?
A. Because she likes the rain.
B. Because the weather is nice.
C. Because she can go swimming.
3. What’s the weather like in Canada during the time?
A. It is dry. B. It is hot. C. It is cool.
1
4
3
Activity 2
Activity 3
UNIT 4
57
2
UNIT 4
58
Pair work. Discuss what you know about the following ball
games in the following pictures.
Listen to the conversation and answer the question.
Listen and read, and then complete the summary.
Group work. Talk about a sports club you want to join with
your partners.
(Wang Junfeng and Kangkang are talking on the phone.)
Wang Junfeng: Hi, this is Wang Junfeng.
Kangkang: Hi, Wang Junfeng. What are you doing?
Wang Junfeng: I’m putting on my football shoes. I want to play football.
Do you want to come and play with me?
Kangkang: Sorry, I’m working on my homework. And I’m not really good
at playing football.
Wang Junfeng: Why not join the football club? You can learn to play it.
Kangkang: Great! Are you in the club?
Wang Junfeng: Yes. I love football and I can play it very well.
Kangkang: Good for you. I hope I can play football well like you.
Wang Junfeng likes playing football and he _________ it very well. Wang
Junfeng wants Kangkang to play football __________ him. But Kangkang is
doing his ___________ and he is ________________ playing football. So Wang
Junfeng asks him to join the football __________. Kangkang hopes he can play
football well like Wang Junfeng.
Why does Kangkang want to join the football club?
ping-pong
badminton
baseball
football
basketball
Function
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Activity 4
A phone call invitation
UNIT 4
59
Listen and repeat.
Listen and circle the word with a different sound of the
colored letters in each group.
Listen to the text. Pay attention to the pronunciation of the
colored letters.
Listen to the following sentences. Pay attention to the rising
tones ( ) and the falling tones ( ).
Pronunciation
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 4
1. Sports are good for us in many ways.
2. --- What sports do you like?
--- I like playing football.
3. --- Do you often play sports?
--- Yes, I do.
Letter(s)
o
u
l
m
n
ng
Sound
/9/
/D/
/7/
/u/
//
/l/
/l/
/m/
/n/
/M/
Word
go
no
dog
hot
run
fun
blue
rule
put
pull
like
last
old
hole
game
make
fan
net
swing
ping-pong
Bob likes walking.
It’s fun to walk by the blue lake.
He puts on his blue shoes.
And he goes with his dogs.
Bob looks happy.
And the dogs are lovely!
1. OK hope rose
Bob
3. rule pull push put
2. cup us put sun
4. hot dog not nose
For wh-questions and
statements, we use
the falling tone. For yes/no
questions, we use the rising tone.
TIPS
Phonetic symbols (/9/ /D/ /7/ /u/ // /l/
/m/ /n/ /M/) & Intonation
UNIT 4
60
Read the text and complete the setting chart.
Pair work. Draw a setting chart of your favorite sport and share
it with your partner.
Many Americans love playing baseball. They play it all year long. On sunny or cloudy
days, they play it outdoors. On rainy days, they play it indoors.
Exploring the Topic
UNIT
4
Activity 2
Activity 3
The setting of
playing Chinese yo-yo
It’s sunny in the morning. The girl is
playing Chinese yo-yo in the park.
The setting of ___________
Place:
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
Time:
Weather:
Look at the picture and read the text. Learn how to identify
the setting.
Activity 1
The setting is when and where a story or an event takes place. It usually includes time,
place, weather, etc.
Identifying setting
Thinking Skills
Weather:
sunny
Place:
in the
park
Time:
in the
morning
UNIT 4
61
Read the text again and complete the summary.
Group work. Talk about your exercise tips, and then invite your
partners to summarize your statements.
Summary
Tips for exercise:
1. Wear the right __________ and __________.
2. Take some __________.
3. Do _______________________ first.
4. Don’t exercise too much in very __________ or __________ weather.
Activity 2
Activity 3
Read the text and underline the important points.
Activity 1
To write a good summary, you need to identify all the important points first and then
put them together in your own words.
Exercise is good for your health,
but how do you do it? Here are
some tips.
Always wear the right shoes and
sports clothes. Sometimes, you
need to take some water with you.
For most sports, it’s important to
warm up before exercise. Don’t do
sports too much in very hot or cold
weather.
Summarizing
Reading Strategies
UNIT 4
62
Pair work. Look at the pictures and answer the questions.
Read the text and summarize the spirit of the football game.
Read the text again and mark T (True) or F (False).
1. The text is about a football game.
2. The boys are having a PE class now.
3. Wang Junfeng’s team wins the game with the help of Mr. Li.
4. Wang Junfeng is a member of the school football team.
( )
( )
( )
( )
Wang Junfeng loves football.
He often plays football with his
classmates after class on Friday.
Now it’s sunny out there. All
the boys are having fun on the
playground.
Wang Junfeng’s team is not
playing very well at the start.
But Wang Junfeng doesn’t
give up. He keeps running and
passing the ball. In the end, they win the game two to one. His PE teacher, Mr. Li,
is watching the game. He hopes Wang Junfeng can play for the school football team,
and that is Wang Junfeng’s wish, too. Now he is feeling like a big football star!
Theme Reading
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
1. What is Lili doing in each of the pictures?
2. What sports do you often do?
A football game
UNIT 4
63
Pair work. Complete the setting chart according to the text,
and then talk about Wang Junfeng’s football game.
Look at the pictures. Read the texts and circle the correct words.
My friend Lanlan loves sports. She (play/
plays) many different sports. Look! She (is
playing/plays) football now. She always
feels good after exercise.
Activity 4
Activity 5
Hi, my name is Li Xiang. On weekends,
I like to (go hiking/go shopping) with
my family. We have great fun (outdoors/
indoors). We often do this on warm days
in (spring/summer).
The setting of ___________
Place:
Time:
Weather:
—————————
—————————
—————————
UNIT 4
64
Personal pronoun
(subjective case)
I
he
it
we
you
they
Personal pronoun
(objective case)
me
you
her
it
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
the personal pronouns in bold.
Complete the table and notice how the personal pronouns are
spelt when used as subjects or objects.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with personal pronouns.
My favorite sport is playing badminton. My parents
often take ________ to play ________ in the park.
Playing badminton is a lot of fun. My father is good
at running. From _______, I learn how to run fast.
My mother plays badminton well. From _______, I
learn how to play badminton. Sometimes, I also play
it with other people and learn a lot from _______. It
is a good sport for all of _______!
The girl is lovely. We all
like her very much.
Uncle Li uses glasses to read.
They are helpful for him.
Please pass the basketball
to me.
The sunny weather makes
us warm.
I often play jianzi with
my parents. I love playing
it very much.
The grapes are so good. I
like eating them very much.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Grammar in Use
Personal pronouns (objective case)
UNIT 4
65
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
am/is/are+v.-ing.
Read the sentences and complete the table.
Look at the picture and complete the text with the correct form
of the phrases in the box.
Positive
Negative
I’m (am) working.
I’m (am) not working.
You’re/We’re/They’re ( _____ ) working.
You/We/They aren’t ( _____ ) working.
He’s/She’s/It’s ( _____ ) working.
He/She/It _____ ( _____ ) working.
She is riding a bike.
She isn’t taking a bus.
It is raining.
It isn’t snowing.
They are running.
They aren’t walking.
It’s a nice day. There are many people in the
park. The woman in pink ______________
with her friend. Look at the woman in red.
She ______________. My aunt and uncle
are over there. They ______________. They
like running. Mr. White ______________ by
the lake. The girl in yellow is his sister. She
______________.
take photos do sports have a picnic walk the dog feed a bird
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
The present continuous tense
I am riding a bike.
You are dancing in the rain.
We are running.
UNIT 4
66
Developing the Topic
UNIT
4
Oral Communication
A. Listen to the conversation and circle the correct answers.
B. Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Choose one sport
or activity from the pictures and make up
a conversation. The following questions
may help you.
Many _________ people are doing Tai Chi out there. It is very cold, but Tai
Chi is a very good _________for them. Li Xiang’s grandfather is good at
doing Tai Chi, and he does it every day. People do it in all _________. It can
keep them _________.
Activity 1
Activity 2
1. What’s your favorite sport/activity?
2. Who do you like to do it with?
3. When and where do you do it?
4. How often do you do it?
5. Why do you like it?
1. Xiao Ya and Li Xiang are in the park/at school.
2. Li Xiang is good/is not good at Tai Chi.
3. Li Xiang’s grandfather does Tai Chi with his friends/his family every morning.
4. People do Tai Chi indoors/outdoors in winter.
Talking about traditional
Chinese sports
Wh-questions (what,
who, why, etc.) are
helpful for you to make
conversations with others.
TIPS
UNIT 4
67
Read the text and complete the setting chart.
Draw a setting chart about your favorite sport.
My Favorite Sport
I’m from Xinjiang, China. My favorite sport is
skiing.
Skiing has a long history in my hometown, Altay.
People travel here to ski in winter. I often ski with
my friends in the beautiful snow season. It is sunny
today. My friends and I are skiing in the mountains.
I’m good at making turns. And my friends move
very fast.
I also enjoy watching skiing games on TV. I can
learn a lot from it.
I love skiing. It’s lots of fun!
• Setting of skiing
• More about you
and the sport
Activity 1
Activity 2
Writing about your favorite
sport
Reading for Writing
Title
Beginning
Body
End
The setting of _________
Place:
Time:
Weather:
UNIT 4
68
Draft your essay about your favorite sport.
Make your final draft in your exercise book.
_________________________
I’m from ______________________. My favorite sport is
_____________________________________________________ .
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________ .
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________ .
I love ___________________________________________ . It’s
________________________________!
How well can you ____________________ ?
Partner’s
rating
express your view of favorite sports
use the thinking skill of presenting settings
introduce your favorite sport
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use the present continuous tense
use punctuation
spell the words
Activity 3
Activity 4
Activity 5
• More about you
and the sport
Title
Beginning
Body
End
• Setting of sport
Invite your partner to rate your final draft. Write 1 (more improvements
needed), 2 (fair), 3 (good), or 4 (excellent) for the ratings.
UNIT 4
69
Here are the results of our survey. There are ...
The Sports Union is doing a survey of sports activities among
the students. Complete the survey and share your answers.
Report the survey results to the class.
Group work. Ask more questions for the survey and carry it out in
class, and then draw a diagram for each question according to the example
and discuss the results.
Making a survey of sports activities
A Sports Survey
Name: ___________ Age: _____________ Class: ______________
1. What is your favorite sport?
A. Ping-pong. B. Basketball. C. Football. D. Others. _______
2. How long do you do your favorite sport every week?
A. 15 hours. B. 10 hours. C. 5 hours. D. Others. _______
3. Which new sport do you want to learn?
A. Running. B. Skiing. C. Swimming. D. Others. _______
Wrapping Up the Topic
Project
UNIT
4
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ping-pong
basketball
football
others
Sports
No. of
students
Favorite Sport (Example)
We have … questions in our
survey.
For Question One, … students’
favorite sport is ping-pong. …
For Question Two, …
UNIT 4
70
Look at the pictures and fill in the blanks with the correct form
of the given words.
It’s warm today. Kangkang and I are ________ our
bikes to the zoo. Kangkang likes ________ his bike
very much and he ________ to school every day. I
sometimes ________ to school, too.
It’s a good day today, and Lingling is ________
jianzi in the park. She ________ it very often and
she enjoys ________ it very much.
I enjoy different activities in different seasons. In spring, I like going hiking with
my family. It’s always w_________. Sometimes it r________. I read books at
home. Summer is always h________. I like going swimming with my family. In
a________, I enjoy taking a walk in the park on c________ days. Winter is always
cold. But on s________ days, I can play with snow outdoors with my friends.
Review
Complete the text with the help of the beginning letters.
Activity 2
Activity 3
Pair work. Listen to the text and complete the table, and
then discuss the weather in different places.
Activity 1
Country
Weather
Things to take
England
It is warm and rains a lot.
__________________________
Australia
It’s not __________.
__________________________
China
It’s very __________.
a cap and a pair of shorts
ride
play
UNIT 4
71
Read the text and then do the reading tasks.
In my school, we have a sports day every spring and autumn. Today is
our autumn sports day.
We are playing different sports on the playground. Look, some
students are playing basketball and ping-pong. Some are running like
wind. Some others are having three-legged races as a team. Our parents
are also here. Some of them are watching on the sides of the playground.
Some are even doing sports with us!
I love our sports day!
Activity 4
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
___________________________
1. When does the school have the sports day?
2. What are the students doing on the autumn sports day?
3. What are the parents doing?
4. Look at the pictures and write down the names of the sports.
UNIT 4
72
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of daily activities.
I enjoy daily activities in different seasons, such as ___________
____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can say the vowel and consonant sounds.
I can use the vocabulary for/of seasons, weather and sports.
I can use the personal pronouns and present continuous tense.
I can understand the sports in different countries.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities?
I can talk about daily activities in different seasons.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can introduce traditional Chinese sports to others.
I can write about my favorite sport.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can describe the setting of an event.
I can use the summarizing strategy in reading.
I can work with my partners in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make a survey of sports activities with my partners.
I can report our project to the class.
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Big Question: What can we find in nature?
In this unit, you will learn to:
talk about nature.
enjoy the beauty of different natural places.
use a chart to compare and contrast.
use picture clues to guess the meaning of new words.
make a class booklet about nature.
UNIT
Love Mother Nature!
Love Mother Nature!
5
UNIT 5
74
B. Read the descriptions and write the words above in the blanks.
C. Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
and practice with your partner.
A. Match the words (a–f) with the pictures at the top of the next page.
It has little rain, so it’s very dry.
1. ___________ It has little rain here, so it’s very dry.
2. ___________ It is hot and wet. It is home to many
plants and animals.
3. ___________ It falls from hills or mountains. It is very beautiful and people like
to take pictures with it.
4. ___________ It is very big. You can find many kinds of sea animals in it.
What is a desert like?
Activity 1
sea
waterfall
desert
mountain
rainforest
grassland
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
5
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5. ___________ There is a lot of grass. Elephants and many other animals live here.
6. ___________ It is high and usually there is not much air on the top of it.
We can use some,
a lot of, lots of,
little and much in front of
uncountable nouns.
TIPS
Listening & Speaking
Different landforms, different
climates
UNIT 5
75
Listen to the riddle and guess what Miss Wang is describing,
and then fill in the blanks.
Pair work. Make riddles of some places in nature and invite your
partner to guess them.
It is __________
______________ .
In some places, there is
grass and some trees.
_________ and sheep live
there. What is it?
Activity 2
Activity 3
UNIT 5
76
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about the desert.
Listen to the conversation and answer the question.
Listen and read, and then complete the summary.
Group work. Discuss more information about deserts and report
it in your class.
Deserts are very dry because it rains _______. But it is not always hot in deserts.
In some deserts, it is _______ in summer but very cold in winter. Some animals
can live in deserts and people can live there, too. The houses often have small
__________. People usually live_______ the lakes in deserts.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Activity 4
Miss Wang: Today, we are talking about deserts. Do you have any questions
about deserts?
Kangkang: What’s the climate like in deserts?
Miss Wang: It is usually dry, because there is little rain.
Kangkang: Is it hot in deserts?
Miss Wang: Not always. There are cold deserts. It is hot in summer but very
cold in winter.
Xiao Ya: Can animals and plants live in deserts?
Miss Wang: Yes, they can. Deserts are home to some animals and plants.
Lulu: Can people live in deserts, too?
Miss Wang: Yes. In deserts, most houses have small windows to keep out
the sun and the wind.
Li Xiang: How do people get water in deserts?
Miss Wang: There are lakes in some deserts. People usually live near the lakes.
What are Miss Wang and her students talking about?
Function
Facts about deserts
UNIT 5
76
UNIT 5
77
Listen and repeat.
Listen to the chant. Pay attention to the pronunciation of
the colored letters.
Read the following sounds aloud and spell the words.
Listen and repeat the following sentences. Pay attention
to the liaisons ( ).
1. Talk about nature.
2. It is usually hot and dry.
3. Trees are home to some animals.
4. The forest is a beautiful place.
5. Some animals live in deserts.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Activity 4
Pronunciation
/pɑːk/＿＿＿ /hɔ:s/＿＿＿ /Gɜːl/＿＿＿ /θri:/＿＿＿
/kæts/＿＿＿ /bɜːdz/＿＿＿ /'wɔ:tə(r)/＿＿＿ /'jel9/＿＿＿
Letter(s)
ar
or
ir
er
th
ts
ds
w/wh
y
Sound
//
//
//
/9/
/F/
//
/ts/
/dz/
/w/
/j/
Word
farm
dark
horse
north
bird
girl
farmer
sister
thin
think
that
these
visits
its
stands
birds
with
swim
white
when
year
you
That thin farmer visits the farm.
A lovely, white horse stands with him.
Many birds are singing near them.
And he is having a good time.
Try to link the ending
consonant of a word to the
beginning vowel of the next word.
It is easier to speak English in this way.
TIPS
Phonetic symbols (// // // /9/ /F/ //
/ts/ /dz/ /w/ /j/) & Liaison
UNIT 5
78
Look at the pictures and read the text. Learn how to compare
and contrast.
Read the text and complete the comparison and contrast chart.
Pair work. Draw a comparison and contrast chart about two
animals you know, and then share it with your partner.
Pandas live in the mountains of China. A panda has four
legs and a short tail. Most of them are black and white.
Their favorite food is bamboo.
Brown bears live in the forests of North America. They are
brown in color. They have four strong legs. They eat grass,
fish and many other things.
Bats and birds can fly. Most bats are active at night and most birds are
active in the day.
To compare, tell what is similar here.
To contrast, tell what is different here.
active at night
fly
active in the day
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Comparing and contrasting
Exploring the Topic
Thinking Skills
UNIT
5
Living place: __________
Color: ________________
Food: ________________
Living place: __________
Color: ________________
Food: ________________
can
To compare, we tell how things are similar. To contrast, we tell how things are different.
Pandas
Brown bears
Look at the pictures and answer the questions.
Read the text and guess the meaning of the underlined words
by using the pictures above.
Look at the pictures and read the text, and then guess the
meaning of the underlined words.
1. Where can you see so many trees?
2. Do you think these trees have flowers?
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Shunan Bamboo Forest is in Yibin, Sichuan.
It is a sea of bamboos. There are about 400
different kinds of bamboos. In summer, the
bamboos grow thickly, and the forest is all
green. People can take the cable cars and
have a good look at the beautiful forest.
UNIT 5
79
Guessing word meaning
through pictures
When you are reading, you can use pictures to guess the meaning of new words.
Reading Strategies
There are lots of pine trees in Daxing’anling. They can grow very tall.
They bloom in May and June and the flowers are red.
UNIT 5
80
Pair work. Look at the pictures and talk about what you know
about rainforests and deserts.
Read the text and guess the meaning of the underlined words.
Read the text again and complete the table.
Rainforests and deserts are two very different living places in nature.
In a rainforest, it is warm and wet, and it rains a lot. You can find many kinds
of plants and animals there. Plants can grow very tall, and animals have plenty
of food to eat. The desert is hot and dry. It rains very little there. There are also
some kinds of plants in the desert, like cactuses. These plants can keep water.
Only a few animals can live in the desert because animals don’t have much to
eat. Most desert animals live on other small animals.
Rainforests and deserts are wonders of nature. They are home to many animals
and plants.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Theme Reading
Rainforests and deserts
Paragraph 1
(Beginning)
The two different _______________________ in nature
Paragraph 2
(Body)
The main differences:
1. climate
2. _____________________________
3. _____________________________
Paragraph 3
(End)
They are:
1. ____________ of nature
2. ____________ to animals and plants
UNIT 5
81
Complete the comparison and contrast chart according to
the text.
Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box, and then match
the sentences with the pictures.
1. Horses ____________ grass and they drink water.
2. There are ____________ flowers in my garden.
3. The sea ____________ different kinds of fish.
4. There is __________________ food for animals in the rainforest.
plenty of many kinds of live on be home to
( )
( )
( )
( )
Activity 4
Activity 5
Animals and
plants can
live together.
Rainforests
Deserts
Climate: _____________
and _____________
Climate: _____________
and _____________
Plants: _______________
Plants: _______________
_______________
Animals: many kinds,
with _____________
Animals: only a few kinds;
live on ____________
UNIT 5
82
Indefinite
articles
a
____ cow ____ desk ____ book ____ helpful book
1. There is ____ new plant on the table.
2. The lake is hard to find. You can take ____ map with you.
an
____ egg ____ old man ____ hour ____ apple
1. This is ____ elephant.
2. It’s ____ interesting film. It’s about animals.
Definite
article
the
1. ____ panda over there is Huahua.
2. There are many stars in ____ sky.
3. I am reading a book. ____ book is about nature.
4. I like playing ____ guitar. It makes me feel happy.
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
a, an and the.
Complete the table with proper articles.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with a, an or the.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
There is an egg and a ball.
The egg is small, but the
ball is big.
A man is looking at the
pictures about nature. He
likes the pictures.
A plant needs three things
to grow: sun, earth and
water.
There are four seasons in a year. In spring, ______ weather is warm.
Sometimes it is windy, so I can go to ______ park and fly ______ kite there.
My favorite season is summer because I can wear nice dresses. I have ______
orange dress and all my friends like it. In autumn, I eat ______ apple every
day. And in winter, I can make ______ snowman after it snows.
Articles
Grammar in Use
UNIT 5
83
Can/Can’t
1. Can pine trees grow very tall?
Yes, they can.
2. Can a shark swim?
_____ , it _____ . But it can’t climb.
3. Can butterflies jump?
_____ , they _____ . But they _____ fly.
4. Can a duck fly?
_____ , it _____ . But it _____ fly very high.
5. Plants and animals _____ live together in nature.
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
the modal verb can and its negative form can’
t.
Pair work. Complete the table, and then ask and answer
questions in pairs.
Read the text and fill in the blanks with can or can’
t.
A bee can fly in flowers.
It can’t swim in the water.
Sharks can swim in the water.
They can’t climb trees.
Monkeys can climb trees.
They can’t fly in the sky.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
can/can't
Menglan is a panda in a zoo. People ________
feed him, or go very near him, but they_______
watch him.
Menglan is very lovely. He _______ climb high
in a tree. He ________ play with his toys. He
_______ talk, but when people call his name, he
_______ understand it. It is great fun to watch
him in the zoo.
UNIT 5
84
A. Listen to the conversation and match the opinions with the people.
B. Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Discuss the importance of animals and plants.
The following pictures and questions may help you.
The importance of trees to people and animals
• With no fresh air, we can’t _______.
• Some animals live in the trees and eat _______ of
the trees.
• People can use trees to make tables, chairs and _______.
• People can have a good rest under a tree in _______.
1. What animals and plants do you think
are important to us?
2. Why are they important?
3. How do they help us in our everyday life?
Activity 2
Activity 1
Developing the Topic
UNIT
5
You may begin like this:
Cows are important. They
give us milk. Many people
drink milk every day and
it’s good for our health ...
Trees give home to many wild animals.
People can have a good rest under a tree.
Trees can bring us clean air.
People also need trees for many things in their life.
Miss Zhou
Kangkang
Lingling
Li Xiang
Oral Communication
Talking about the importance
of plants and animals
Read the
exercises
before you listen. It can
help you understand
what you hear.
TIPS
UNIT 5
85
Read the text and complete the comparison and contrast chart.
Draw a comparison and contrast chart about your hometown
and your friend’s.
• Location
• Climate
• Plants and animals
• Activities
Activity 1
Activity 2
Title
Beginning
Body
End
Writing about your hometown
Xishuangbanna
Location: ___________
Climate: ____________
Animals or plants:
_____________________
Activities: ___________
Kunming
Location: ___________
Climate: ____________
Animals or plants:
_____________________
Activities: ___________
Our Hometown—Yunnan
Our Hometown—Yunnan
My cousin Lulu and I come from two different
places in Yunnan, and Yunnan is our hometown.
I am from Xishuangbanna. It is in the south of
Yunnan. The climate is hot, and many wild animals
like elephants and monkeys live here in the forest.
I often join in the activities to look after the wild
animals. Lulu lives in Kunming. It is in the middle
of Yunnan. The climate in Kunming is warm. There
are different kinds of plants in every season, and
people all like to grow beautiful flowers at home.
Welcome to our beautiful hometown! You will have
a good time here any time in the year!
Reading for Writing
UNIT 5
86
Draft your essay about your hometown and your friend’
s.
Make your final draft in your exercise book.
________________
My friend and I come from two different places in ___
_______________________________________________________.
_________________________________________________________ .
I am from _______________. It is _______________________.
_______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________ .
Welcome to visit our beautiful hometown! ___________
________________________________！
Activity 3
Activity 4
Activity 5
• Location
• Climate
• Plants and
animals
• Activities
Title
Beginning
Body
End
How well can you ____________________ ?
Partner’s
rating
express your view of caring for nature
use the thinking skill of making comparison and contrast
introduce your hometown
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use can/can’t
use punctuation
spell the words
Invite your partner to rate your final draft. Write 1 (more improvements
needed), 2 (fair), 3 (good), or 4 (excellent) for the ratings.
UNIT 5
87
Read one page from a booklet about nature and answer the
questions.
Group work. Design a booklet about nature. Discuss what you
will include in the booklet and write your ideas in the blanks.
Share your design with your classmates. Put all your designs
together to make a class booklet.
Making a class booklet about nature
1. What can you learn about the Amazon Rainforest?
2. What other things do you know about rainforests?
Let me tell you something about …
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Wrapping Up the Topic
Project
UNIT
5
Put a picture here.
• Location: ______________
• Climate: ______________
• Plants: _______________
• Animals: ______________
UNIT 5
88
1
2
3
4
Pair work. Listen to the introduction and fill in the blanks,
and then talk about the highlands.
Look at the pictures and complete the sentences.
1. __________ are very big and blue. They are home to sea animals like
__________.
2. __________ are hot and dry, but the plants there can keep __________
and grow.
3. __________ are hot and wet. There are many big and tall __________
in them. The trees are green all year long.
4. __________ are high. There are trees all over them. __________ live
there, and they feed on plants, fish and small animals.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Review
It’s very ________
and windy here.
There are many cows
and _________ here.
There is a _________ of
stones on the highland.
The earth is yellow, and
it is very _________.
UNIT 5
89
Read the text and fill in the blanks with can or can’
t.
China is a big country. The north and the
south of China are very different.
In the north, it is very cold in winter. It
often snows. People can play winter sports
like skiing. There are some mountains in
the north, but most of them are not very
high. People there like to eat noodles
and dumplings.
In the south, it is warm in winter. There are many big rivers and it rains a lot.
The mountains in the south are very high. People grow vegetables all year long,
and their main food is rice.
Activity 3
Group work. Read the text and complete the table, and then
discuss more differences between the north and the south of China.
Activity 4
The North of China
The South of China
Weather in winter: _______________
Weather in winter: _______________
Mountains: _____________________
Mountains: _____________________
Food: __________________________
Food: __________________________
Mountains make up a big part of nature. We _______ see
mountains all over the world. Many people like to climb
mountains because mountain-climbing _______ keep them
healthy. We _______ also do many fun things
in mountains, like hiking and picnicking. But
we _______ make any fire in mountains. There
are also many mountains under the sea, but we
_______ see them.
UNIT 5
90
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of nature.
I love our mother nature, because nature is home to ___________
_____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can say the vowel and consonant sounds and use liaisons.
I can use the vocabulary for/of nature.
I can use the articles and can/can’t.
I can describe the beauty of different natural places.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities?
I can talk about climates and different landforms.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can introduce the importance of plants and animals.
I can write about my hometown.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can use a chart to compare and contrast.
I can use picture clues to guess the meanings of new words.
I can work with my partners in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make a class booklet about nature with my partners.
I can report our project to the class.
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Big Question: What makes our festivals wonderful?
In this unit, you will learn to:
introduce festivals and holidays.
understand important Chinese and foreign festivals.
use a chart to analyze the plot of a story.
use the reading strategy of making connections.
make a poster of a traditional festival.
UNIT
Celebrating the Big Days
Celebrating the Big Days
6
UNIT 6
92
C. Pair work. Listen and repeat, and then replace the parts in bold
and practice with your partner.
A. Match the festivals (a–f) with the pictures at the top of the next page.
Yes. The Dragon Boat Festival is in June. It
falls on the fifth day of the fifth lunar month.
June, July and August.
Are there any festivals in these months?
Lingling, which months are in summer?
Activity 1
Preparing for the Topic
UNIT
6
b. Spring Festival
d. Tomb-sweeping Day
f. Lantern Festival
a. Double Ninth Festival
c. Mid-Autumn Festival
e. Dragon Boat Festival
B. Read the sentences and fill in the blanks with the festivals above.
1. The _________________ is on lunar August 15th. People eat mooncakes and enjoy
the moon.
2. The____________ is on lunar January 15th. People eat tangyuan or yuanxiao on
that day.
3. The _____________ is on lunar January 1st. Children get lucky money on this day.
4. Around April 5th, people sweep the tombs of their late family members on ______
_____________.
5. The ___________________ falls on the ninth day of the ninth lunar month. It is a
festival for old people.
6. People usually eat zongzi on the ___________________ on lunar May 5th.
Traditional Chinese festivals
Listening & Speaking
UNIT 6
93
Listen to the monolog and fill in the blanks.
Group work. Discuss the activities on different festivals.
A: When is ...? B: It’s on ...
A: What do you do on that day? B: We ...
Activity 2
Activity 3
Labor Day
• Labor Day is on ________________________.
• It is a holiday for _______________ all over the world.
• Most people like to _______________ with their family and friends.
• Some people like to enjoy the _______________ at home.
UNIT 6
94
Pair work. Talk about the festival in the pictures.
Listen to the conversation and answer the question.
Listen and read, and then complete the chart.
Pair work. Talk about Tomb-sweeping Day with your partner.
Jane: Hello, Lulu. Can you go swimming with me?
Lulu: I’m sorry, I can’t. I’m busy now.
Jane: What are you doing?
Lulu: I’m buying some flowers for Tomb-sweeping Day.
Jane: Tomb-sweeping Day? Is it a festival?
Lulu: Yes, it is an important festival in China. Every year, in April, we visit the
tombs of our late family members.
Jane: What do you do there?
Lulu: We tidy up the tombs and put some flowers there.
Jane: I see. It is a festival to remember your late family members.
Lulu: Yes. We also call it the Qingming Festival. During this festival, we also
go on family hiking and enjoy nature together.
Jane: Thank you for telling me so much about this festival.
Lulu: You’re welcome.
What is Lulu doing?
Tomb-sweeping Day (The Qingming Festival)
Month: __________
Activity:
__________ the tombs of late family members
go on __________
enjoy __________
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Activity 4
Function
Tomb-sweeping Day
UNIT 6
95
Listen and repeat.
Listen to the text. Pay attention to the pronunciation of the
colored letters.
Read the words aloud, and then listen, tick(
) and repeat.
Read the following sentences aloud. Pay attention to the
liaisons ( ).
1. Here is a birthday card for you.
2. There are many festivals in China.
3. At dinner, there are all kinds of dishes on the table.
4. There are lots of national flags on the streets.
Activity 2
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 4
Pronunciation
Letter(s)
ow
oy
ear
ure
tr
dr
sh
s
ch
g
Sound
/a/
/I/
/I9/
/e9/
/9/
/tr/
/dr/
//
/E/
/t/
/dE/
Word
brown
how
toy
boy
near
year
wear
pear
sure
ensure
tree
trip
dress
drive
she
ship
usual
measure
child
March
orange
page
( ) down
( ) cow
( ) enjoy
( ) toy
( ) hear
( ) fear
( ) swear
( ) bear
( ) sure
( ) train
( ) travel
( ) dragon
( ) dream
( ) dish
( ) shirt
( ) pleasure
( ) watch
( ) age
The child wears a beautiful dress on International
Children’s Day.
She is happy to play with her friend.
She shares her brown toy bear with her.
And then she drinks orange juice near the pear tree.
“Today is not usual. I have much fun. I’m sure.”
-r/re can be
linked with
a vowel by adding a
consonant /r/.
TIPS
Phonetic symbols (/a/ /I/ /I9/ /e9/ /9/
/tr/ /dr/ // /E/ /t/ /dE/) & Liaison
UNIT 6
96
Look at the pictures and read the text. Learn how to identify
the plot.
Read the text and complete the plot chart.
Pair work. Tell how you spend the New Year’s Day by using a
plot chart.
Christmas is a big festival in America. Every year, Michael’s
parents buy a Christmas tree. They first put colorful lights and
paper on the tree and make it very pretty. And then, they put the
presents under the tree. At Christmas, they have a big dinner and
give presents to each other.
The students are learning
something about New
Year’s Day.
Lingling and Jane
are making cards for
their friends.
They give the cards to
their friends on New
Year’s Day.
Beginning
Middle
End
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Exploring the Topic
Thinking Skills
UNIT
6
Identifying plot
First, they put ______
______________ and
_________________.
And then, they _____
_________________
_________________.
At Christmas, they __
______________ and
_________________.
Beginning
Middle
End
Plot is the order of a story. It tells the beginning, the middle and the end of the story.
Read the text and learn how to make connections.
Confucius is a great thinker and teacher in Chinese history. As
a thinker, his words teach people how to look at the world. As
a teacher, he teaches his students how to think and what to be.
Many of his students are great thinkers and teachers, too.
Connections between what you read and what you know can help you understand the
text better and remember it well.
UNIT 6
97
Making connections
Read the text again and make another connection.
Read the text and make connections.
September 10th is Teachers’ Day in China. On
this day, students thank their teachers in many
ways. They write “Thank you, teacher!” on
the blackboard or make a thank-you card for
their teachers. Sometimes they sing songs for
their teachers and give best wishes to them.
Our teachers love us all, so each of us should
thank them.
What I read: Confucius is also a _______________________________________.
What I know: I also know another great teacher, __________________________.
Now I understand: Good teachers ________________________________________.
What I read: Confucius is a great thinker.
What I know: I also know another great thinker, _____________.
Now I understand: Thinkers teach people how to look at the world.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
What I read: _______________________________________________________
What I know: ______________________________________________________
Now I understand: __________________________________________________
Reading Strategies
UNIT 6
98
Pair work. Match the activities with the pictures, and then talk
about more activities.
Read the text and make connections.
watching the Spring Festival TV show
putting up the Spring Festival couplets
having a big meal
getting lucky money
Activity 1
Activity 2
What I read: ______________________________________________________
What I know: _____________________________________________________
Now I understand: ________________________________________________
1
2
3
4
It’s the last day of the Chinese lunar year, and we are having celebrations
to welcome the Spring Festival.
Look, my father is putting up the Spring Festival couplets. And here in
the kitchen, my mother is making some delicious dishes with my aunts.
Now, it’s time for dinner. We are having a big meal. Everybody is eating
and drinking happily. And at the table, my grandparents give some lucky
money to my young cousins and me. Finally, here comes the TV show for
the Spring Festival! All the Chinese around the world watch the show and
welcome the Chinese New Year together.
We all enjoy the family time and are excited to celebrate the Spring
Festival together.
Theme Reading
Celebrating the Spring Festival
UNIT 6
99
Read the text again and mark T (True) or F (False).
Complete the plot chart according to the text.
Group work. Look at the pictures and discuss the questions.
1. The text is about celebrations during the Spring Festival. ( )
2. The Chinese New Year is on the first day of every year.
( )
3. The author has a big family.
( )
4. Some of the author’s cousins can’t get lucky money.
( )
Father ____________
_________________
_________________
Mother ___________
_________________
Activity 3
Activity 5
Activity 4
1. Do you think the Spring Festival is a holiday of family time? Why?
2. What do you like best about the Spring Festival?
Beginning
Middle
End
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
UNIT 6
100
Look at the pictures and read the sentences. Pay attention to
the words in bold.
Pair work. Complete the table and learn how to form ordinal
numbers.
Read the text and tick (
) the correct words.
On Tree-planting Day every year, Miss Wang
always takes her students to plant trees in the
park. She plants the (one/first) tree to show
the students how to do it. Then, she helps
some students to plant the (two/second) tree.
After that, boys plant the (three/third) tree and
girls plant the (four/fourth) tree. In the end,
students plant trees by themselves. This year,
Miss Wang wants to plant (nine/the ninth) trees.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
Teachers’ Day is on
September 10th.
About one hundred people
are taking part in the dragon
boat race.
I’m thirteen years old.
This is my thirteenth
birthday.
1
one
first
1st
15
fifteen
____________
15th
2
two
second
2nd
20
twenty
twentieth
20th
3
three
third
3rd
21
twenty-one
twenty-first
21st
4
four
_______
4th
40
forty
fortieth
40th
5
five
fifth
5th
50
fifty
____________
50th
8
eight
_______
8th
90
ninety
____________
90th
9
nine
ninth
9th
100
one hundred
one _________
_______
12
twelve
twelfth
12th
101
one hundred and one one hundred and ____
101st
Grammar in Use
Ordinal numbers
UNIT 6 101
Subject
The simple present tense
The present
continuous tense
I
am (not) happy.
(don’t) sing.
______ (not) singing.
You/We/They
are (not) happy.
(______) sing.
are (not) singing.
He/She/It
______ (not) happy.
sings/doesn’t sing.
______ (not) ______.
Pair work. Read the conversation. Pay attention to the verbs
in bold.
Complete the table and think about the usage of the simple
present and present continuous tense.
Read the text and rewrite the underlined sentences in the
present continuous tense.
We always make dumplings
and watch TV shows.
Yes, I do. And I am learning how to
make dumplings these days.
At the Mid-Autumn Festival, my family
eat mooncakes to celebrate it. At night,
we also have a big dinner together. We
eat delicious food and have some drinks.
And then we enjoy the moon and talk
with each other. My father lights the
lanterns and hangs them in trees. We
enjoy the beautiful night very much.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Activity 3
The simple present tense & The present continuous tense
Do you like eating dumplings?
What do your family do at the Spring Festival?
UNIT 6
102
A. Listen to the conversation and put the pictures you hear in order.
B. Listen again and complete the table.
Group work. Discuss the following days, and then choose one
to share in the class. The following questions may help you.
National Day
Date
October 1st.
Celebrations
• Put the national flags on the ____________.
• ____________ the national flag at Tian’anmen Square.
• Watch people raising the national flag on ____________.
• Put beautiful ____________ on the sides of streets.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Developing the Topic
UNIT
6
Oral Communication
Talking about holidays
1. What festivals are there in the pictures?
2. When are these festivals?
3. What’s your favorite festival?
4. What do you usually do on that day?
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
Beginning
Middle
End
UNIT 6 103
Read the text and complete the plot chart.
Draw a plot chart about how you celebrate your favorite festival.
Celebration plot:
• Beginning
• Middle
• End
Activity 1
Activity 2
Title
Beginning
Body
End
Writing about your favorite
festival
The Lantern Festival
The Lantern Festival falls on the last day of the
Chinese New Year. It is an important day for
Chinese. Family members often get together on
that day.
Every year, we
all have great fun
on that day. First,
in the morning,
we prepare for
the celebrations. My father hangs red lanterns. We
all like red because it is a lucky color. And then, we
have a big meal and my mother cooks some really
delicious tangyuan. At night, my sister and I guess
the lantern riddles with our grandparents.
I love the Chinese Lantern Festival. It is so much
fun!
Reading for Writing
UNIT 6
104
Draft your essay about your favorite festival.
Make your final draft in your exercise book.
___________________
________________ is very important in _________________ .
We _________________________________________________ .
First, _________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________ .
Next, _______________________________________________ .
______________________________________________________ .
Lastly, _______________________________________________ .
______________________________________________________ !
Activity 3
Activity 4
Activity 5
Celebration plot:
• Beginning
• Middle
• End
Title
Beginning
Body
End
How well can you ____________________ ?
Partner’s
rating
express your view of traditional festivals
use the thinking skill of making a plot
introduce a Chinese festival to a foreign friend
organize ideas into a well-balanced structure
use the theme vocabulary of the unit
use the simple present tense and present continuous tense
use punctuation
spell the words
Invite your partner to rate your final draft. Write 1 (more improvements
needed), 2 (fair), 3 (good), or 4 (excellent) for the ratings.
UNIT 6 105
Look at the poster and answer the questions. Write the answer
to the first question in the blank.
Group work. Choose one traditional festival in the world and
design a poster for it.
Introduce the festival in your poster to the class.
1. What is the festival in the poster?
2. When is the festival?
3. What do people do on that day?
Here is our poster ... is an important traditional festival in ... On this day, people ...
Activity 1
Activity 3
Activity 2
Making a poster of a traditional festival
Wrapping Up the Topic
Project
UNIT
6
Put some pictures here.
Facts about __________
Date: _______________________
Importance: _________________
_____________________________
Main activities:
• ____________________________
• ____________________________
• ...
Facts about __________
Date: Lunar May 5th
Importance: Remembering Qu Yuan
Main activities:
• Making and eating zongzi
• Having dragon boat races
UNIT 6
106
Pair work. Listen to the radio program and match the pictures
with the months and countries, and then talk about what you know about
the festivals.
Look at the pictures and fill in the blanks with the help of the
first given letters.
Activity 1
Activity 2
Review
October 1st is the National Day of the People’s Republic
of China. Chinese people c__________ the b________
of the People’s Republic of China on this day.
The Lantern Festival falls on lunar January 15th. On this
day, people eat tangyuan, a kind of r___________ balls,
watch lantern shows and guess riddles on lanterns.
May
February
March
Russia
New Zealand
France
Mother’s Day is on the second Sunday in May. People
show their l_______ for their mothers by giving them
flowers and other p___________.
UNIT 6 107
Read the text and fill in the blanks with the correct form of the
given words.
Activity 3
Activity 4 Read the text and answer the questions.
In Madrid, Spain, people begin New Year’s Day celebrations on the night of
December 31st. They take part in many activities to welcome the new year.
People usually have a big dinner with their family on that day. After dinner,
lots of people go to the street and have different celebrations. At midnight,
the bells of Puerta del Sol ring together twelve times and people eat twelve
grapes and then say “happy new year” to each other. In doing so, people hope
they will have good luck in every month of the coming new year.
Lingling: Mom, you are _______ (make) Chongyang
cakes. How nice!
Mom: Yes. Today is the Double Ninth Festival.
We’re ______ (go) for hiking with the cakes.
Lingling: I know the festival ______ (fall) on the ninth
day of the ninth month in the lunar calendar.
It _______ (be) a festival for old people.
Grandfather and grandmother ______ (be)
so happy.
Mom: I ______ (be) also very happy. Your father
______ (not) have to work today. He can ______ (go) hiking with
us too.
Lingling: Wonderful!
1. What is the main idea of the text?
2. When do people begin to celebrate New Year’s Day?
3. What celebrations can you find in the text?
4. What do you usually do for celebrations on the night before New Year’s Day?
UNIT 6
108
Self -assessment
1. How much do you enjoy the topic?
I’m interested in the topic of festivals and holidays.
I like many festivals and holidays, such as __________________
____________________________________________________.
2. How well can you use the language and cultural knowledge?
I can say the vowel and consonant sounds and use liaisons.
I can use the vocabulary for/of festivals and holidays.
I can use the ordinal numerals, simple present tense and present
continuous tense.
I can understand important Chinese and foreign festivals.
3. How well can you use English to perform the activities?
I can talk about the activities in traditional Chinese festivals.
I can understand the texts and recordings in this unit.
I can discuss important international holidays.
I can write about my favorite festival.
4. How well can you use thinking skills and learning strategies?
I can analyze the plot of a story.
I can make connections in reading.
I can work with my partners in pair/group work.
5. How are you satisfied with your group project?
I can make a poster of traditional festivals with my partners.
I can report our project to the class.
6. How are you going to improve your English learning?
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Notes to the Text 109
Appendices
附录
Notes to the Text
课文注释
Unit 1 Let’s Be Friends!
1. How do you do? 你好！
“How do you do?”是一个常用的礼貌问候语，通常用于正式场合初次见面的时候。其
答语为“How do you do?”。
2. ―What’s your name, please? 请问你叫什么名字？
―My name is Li Xiang. 我叫李想。
1）“What’s ...” 相当于 “What is ...”，意为“……是什么”。此处的’s 是英语单词is 的缩
写形式。例如：
—What’s this? 这是什么？
—It’s a book. 这是一本书。
2）“My name is ...” 是自我介绍的一种表达法，相当于“I’m ...”。例如：
Hello, everyone! My name is Li Ming./I’m Li Ming. 大家好！我是李明。
3. Nice to meet you. 见到你很高兴。
“Nice to meet you.”通常用于双方初次见面经介绍相识之后的场合，是一种礼貌用语。回
答时常用“Nice to meet you, too.”。
4. Hi, Lulu! This is Xiao Ya. Xiao Ya, this is Lulu. 你好，露露！这是肖雅。肖雅，这是露露。
初次见面介绍某人时常用“ This is ...”，意为“这（位）是 ……”。例如：
Mom, this is my teacher, Mr. Li. Mr. Li, this is my mom. 妈妈，这位是我的老师，李老师。
李老师，这是我的妈妈。
5. ―Where are you from? 你来自哪里？
―I’m from Beijing. 我来自北京。
be from 意为“来自……；从……来”，用于表示某人的籍贯或来自哪里。相当于come
from。例如：
My English teacher is/comes from Canada. 我的英语老师来自加拿大。
6. I’m in Class 6, Grade 7, too. 我也在七年级六班。
Notes to the Text
110
用英语表达“在某年级某班”时，班级在前，年级在后，并且class 和grade 的首字母要
大写。“Class 6, Grade 7”也可以写成“Class Six, Grade Seven”。
7. ―See you. 再见/待会儿见。
―See you. 再见。
“See you.”是英语口语中告别时的一种习惯表达，有稍后再见的意思。回答常用“See
you!”。类似的表达还有“See you later.”“See you then.”“See you tomorrow.”等。
8. I’m friendly and I like science. 我很友好并且喜欢科学。
like 作动词时，意为“喜欢；喜爱”，后常接名词、代词、不定式、动名词。like doing
sth. 意为“喜欢做某事”，可用 like to do sth. 替换。例如：
I like the house. 我喜欢这个房子。
I like playing chess. (I like to play chess.) 我喜欢下棋。
9. We also do many things together, such as swimming and running. 我们也一起做很多事情，
比如游泳和跑步。
such as 意为“例如；诸如……”，用来列举同类人或事物中的几个例子。例如：
I like ball games, such as basketball, football and ping-pong. 我喜欢球类运动，比如篮球、足
球和乒乓球。
10. I enjoy the time with her. 我很享受和她在一起的时光。
enjoy 意为“喜爱；享受……的乐趣”。后常接名词、代词、动名词，常用enjoy sth./doing
sth. 来表示“喜欢某物/ 做某事”。例如：
I enjoy reading books in my free time. 我喜欢在空闲时间看书。
常见短语enjoy oneself. 意为“玩得痛快”。例如：
They all enjoyed themselves at the party. 他们在聚会上都玩得非常痛快。
Unit 2 Meet My Family!
1. That woman in a blue dress is my aunt. 那个穿蓝色连衣裙的女士是我的婶婶。
介词 in 意为“穿着；戴着”，后面常接服装名词。例如：
The boy in a white T-shirt is my friend, Li Hua. 那个穿着白色T 恤衫的男孩是我的朋友李华。
in 后面还可以接表示颜色的名词，意为“穿着……颜色的衣服”。例如：
Li Li is in red today. 李丽今天穿着红色的衣服。
2. What does he do? 他是做什么工作的？
“What do/does ... do?”是询问他人职业的常用句型，意为“……是做什么的？”。
询问他人的职业，还可以用“What is sb.?”或“What is one’s job?”。例如：
—What does your father do?/What’s your father?/What’s your father’s job? 你爸爸是做什么的？
Notes to the Text 111
—He is a teacher. He works in a high school. 他是一名教师。他在一所高中工作。
3. There are three people in his family. They are his parents and him. 他家有三口人，他父母和他。
1）there be 意为“（某地）有某物/ 某人”，其结构一般为“There be + 某人/ 某物+ 某地”。
be 动词的形式根据句子的时态及be 后面的名词的单复数形式而变化。例如：
There is a tree in the garden. 花园里有一棵树。
There are three books on the table. 桌子上有三本书。
2）people 意为“人们；人民”，是集体名词，people 具有复数的含义。例如：
Chinese people are hard-working, kind and brave. 中国人民勤劳、善良又勇敢。
4. The parents live with their children. 父母和他们的孩子住在一起。
live with sb. 意为“和某人住在一起”。例如：
I live with my parents. 我和我父母住在一起。
5. We often visit them on weekends and have dinner together. 我们通常周末去看他们并一起吃饭。
on weekends 意为“在周末”。weekend 用复数形式，表示通常的状况，即“通常在周末”；
如果表示具体的某个周末，则用单数形式。例如：
I usually meet my friends on weekends. 我通常周末去见朋友。
I want to meet my friends this weekend. 这个周末我想去见朋友。
6. What other things do you know about Lin Hua’s family? 你还知道关于林华家人的其他事吗？
Lin Hua’s family 意为“林华的家人”。’s 为名词所有格形式，表示“……的”。
名词所有格常见的有’s 和of 两种。
1）’s 名词所有格，主要用于表示有生命的较高级动物的名词。
单数名词一般在词尾加’s。例如：
Jack’s room 杰克的房间
Sam’s brother 山姆的兄弟
以s 结尾的专有名词加’s 或’。例如：
Charles’s/Charles’ mother 查尔斯的妈妈
James’s/James’ book 詹姆斯的书
以s 结尾的复数名词加’，不以s 结尾的复数名词加’s。例如：
the teachers’ office 教师办公室
the workers’ hospital 工人医院
Children’s readings 儿童读物
2）of 名词所有格，主要用于表示无生命事物的名词。例如：
the four legs of the table 桌子的四条腿
the wall of the room 房间的墙
Notes to the Text
112
Unit 3 Our Colorful School Life
1. ―What time is it now? 现在几点了？
―It’s eight o’clock. 八点。
1)“What time is it?”用于询问时间，相当于“What’s the time?”。
2) 句中的it 指代“时间”。英语中常用 it 来表示时间、距离、天气等。例如：
It is fine today. 今天天气很好。
It’s two kilometers from my home to school. 从我家到学校有2000 米。
3）常用的时间表达法
①直接表达。
例如：8:10 表达为eight ten；如果表示整点的时刻，可在钟点数后加o’clock，也可以不
加。例如：9:00 可表达为 nine 或者 nine o’clock。
②表示“几点过几分”（不超过30 分钟）用“分钟数 + past + 钟点数”表达。例如：
10:20 表达为 twenty past ten；
10:30 表达为 half past ten。
③当分钟数超过30，表示“差几分到几点”时，用“分钟数 + to + 钟点数”表达。例如：
7:50 表达为 ten to eight 意为“差10 分到8 点”；
9:45 表达为 a quarter to ten 意为“差15 分到10 点”。
2. It’s time for our Chinese class. 是我们上语文课的时间了。
1）“It’s time for + 名词或代词”，表示“到……的时间了”。例如：
It’s time for lunch. 到吃午餐的时间了。
2）“It’s time for sth.” 相当于 “It’s time to do sth.”，意为“到……的时间了”。例如：
It’s time for school. (It’s time to go to school.) 到上学的时间了。
3. ... on Thursday afternoon 在星期四的下午
英语中介词 at、in 和 on 都可以表示“在某个时间”，但用法有区别。
at 常表示在某个时刻，指时间点。例如：
at 10:10 在10 点10 分。
in 常表示某个较长的时间，指时间段。例如：
in the morning 在上午；in 2008 在2008 年。
on 常表示在具体的某个日期，或某个特定的上午、下午或晚上。例如：
on Sunday 在星期天；on May 10th 在5 月10 日；on a cold morning 在一个寒冷的早晨。
4. My home is not very far, so I usually come here on foot, sometimes by bike. 我家（离学校）
不远，所以我通常步行来这里，有时骑自行车来。
1）英语中常用 and、but、so 等并列连词连接两个句子，表示上下文不同的逻辑关系。其
Notes to the Text 113
中 and 表示并列关系，but 表示转折关系，so 表示因果关系。例如：
I like basketball, but I can’t play it well. 我喜欢篮球，但我打得不好。
I am Kangkang and I’m from Beijing. 我是康康，我来自北京。
2）on foot 意为“步行”；“by + 交通工具”意为“乘坐某种交通工具”。例如：
Chen Wen often goes to Beijing by plane/train. 陈雯经常乘飞机/火车去北京。
5. How about you, Xiao Ya? 你呢，肖雅？
“How about ...?”意为“……怎么样？”“……如何？”，用于非正式场合对所谈的话题进行
反问、询问消息、提出建议或征求意见等。相当于“What about ...?”。例如：
I like Chinese. How/What about you? 我喜欢汉语。你呢？
6. There are no underground stops near my home. 我家附近没有地铁站。
句中 no 相当于 not a/an 或 not any，表示“没有一个……”或“没有任何……”。例如：
Xiao Ming is new here. He has no friends at school. (Xiao Ming is new here. He doesn’t have a
friend/any friends at school.) 肖明是新来的。他在学校里没有朋友。
7. Every afternoon, we have one PE class on the playground. 每天下午，我们在操场上一节体育课。
have ... class/lesson 意为“上……课”。have 和不同的名词搭配，可表达不同的含义。例如：
have breakfast/lunch/dinner 吃早餐/午餐/晚餐
have a basketball game 举行一场篮球比赛
have a class meeting 开班会
have a walk 散步
8. We can join the clubs, play sports or go to the library. 我们可以加入俱乐部、做运动，或者
去图书馆。
join 意为“加入（组织、社团或团体），成为……的一员”。例如：
She joined the company three months ago. 她三个月前进了这家公司。
Unit 4 Fun in the Sun!
1. ―What’s the weather like in autumn? 秋天的天气怎么样？
―It’s cool. （天气）凉爽。
“What’s the weather like ... ?”是询问天气状况的常用句型，可与“How is the weather ... ?”
互换，回答时常使用“It’s + 表示天气特征的形容词”。例如：
—What’s the weather like in spring in Beijing? (How’s the weather in spring in Beijing?) 北京
春天的天气怎么样？
—It’s sunny and warm. （天气）晴朗且暖和。
2. And I’m not really good at playing football. 而且我不是很擅长踢足球。
Notes to the Text
114
be good at 意为“擅长……”，后可接名词、代词或动词的-ing 形式。例如：
Xiao Ya is good at English. 肖雅擅长英语。
3. Why not join the football club? 为什么不加入足球俱乐部呢？
“Why not + 动词原形 + 其他？”意为“为什么不……呢？”，用来向对方提出建议，相当
于“Why don’t you + 动词原形+ 其他？”。例如：
Why not go out for fun? (Why don’t you go out for fun?) 你为什么不出去玩呢？
4. Exercise is good for your health, but how do you do it? 运动对你们的健康有益，但是你们怎
么做运动呢？
be good for ... 意为“对……有好处”，后可接名词、代词。例如：
Milk is good for our bodies. 牛奶对我们的身体有益。
5. Here are some tips. 这里有一些建议。
Here are/is ... 意为“这是……；这儿有……”，用于介绍或引入话题。例如：
Here are two nice photos of my room. 这是两张我房间的漂亮照片。
6. He keeps running and passing the ball. 他不停地奔跑，传球。
keep doing sth. 意为“一直做某事；坚持做某事”。例如：
We should keep exercising. 我们应该坚持锻炼。
Unit 5 Love Mother Nature!
1. It has little rain here, so it’s very dry. 这里很少下雨，所以天气非常干燥。
句中little 用作限定词，意为“少量的，不多的”，表示否定的含义，后接不可数名词，
意为“几乎没有”。例如：
There is little water in the cup. 杯子里几乎没有水。
2. It is home to many plants and animals. 它是许多植物和动物的家园。
(be) home to sb./sth. 意为“（人或动植物的）生息地，栖息地”。例如：
Rainforests are home to many kinds of plants and animals. 雨林是许多动植物的家园。
3. Not always. 不总是。
not 常与 always、every、all 等词搭配构成部分否定，意为“不总是；不是每一个；不都
是”。例如：
Not every kind of birds can fly. 并不是每一种鸟都能飞。
Unit 6 Celebrating the Big Days
1. During this festival, we also go on family hiking and enjoy nature together. 在这个节日期间，
人们也会和家人一起去徒步，享受自然。
Notes to the Text 115
during 意为“在……期间”，用于指明某件事情发生或存在的具体时间段。例如：
I drink a lot of water during my exercise. 我运动时喝很多水。
2. ― Thank you for telling me so much about this festival. 谢谢你告诉我这么多关于这个节日的事。
―You’re welcome. 不用谢。
1）thanks for ... 或thank sb. for ... 意为“因……而感谢某人”，后接名词、代词或动词
的-ing 形式。例如：
Thanks for your help. (Thank you for helping me.) 谢谢你的帮助。
2）
“You’re welcome.” 用来回答别人的感谢，意为“不用谢；别客气”。常见的还有“Not
at all.”“That’s all right.”“It’s my pleasure.”等。
Grammar
116
Grammar
语法
Ⅰ. 一般现在时（The simple present tense）
1. 一般现在时的形式
动词be
第一人称单数：am
第三人称单数：is
其他：are
动词have
第三人称单数：has
其他：have
其他动词
第三人称单数：动词原形 + s/es
其他：用动词原形
当主语是第三人称单数时，动词形式有下列几种变化：
规则
读音
动词原形
第三人称单数形式及读音
一般动词在词尾加-s
在清辅音后读/s/
在浊辅音或元音后读/z/
like
tell
play
likes /laIks/
tells /telz/
plays /pleIz/
以s、x、ch、sh 结
尾的动词加-es
读/Iz/
guess
teach
guesses /GesIz/
teaches /titIz/
以o 结尾的动词一般
加-es
读/z/
do
go
does /d7z/
goes /G9z/
以辅音字母加y 结尾
的动词，先变y 为i，
再加-es
读/z/
fly
carry
flies /flaIz/
carries /kærIz/
2. 一般现在时的用法
（1）表示现在的状态。例如：
My name is Michael. I am twelve. 我叫迈克尔。我12 岁了。
（2）表示经常的或习惯性的动作。例如：
He always gets up at six. 他经常六点钟起床。
（3）表示特征或能力。例如：
Grammar 117
He likes English a lot. 他很喜欢英语。
（4）表示客观存在或普遍真理等。例如：
The earth goes around the sun. 地球围绕着太阳转。
Ⅱ. There be 结构 (There be structure)
There be 结构一般为“There is/are + 某物/人+ 某地”， 表示“某地有某物/人”。
There be 结构的一般现在时如下：
肯定句
There is a computer on the desk.
There are some students on the playground.
否定句
There isn’t a computer on the desk.
There aren’t any students on the playground.
疑问句
Is there a computer on the desk?
Are there any students on the playground?
答语
Yes, there is.
No, there isn’t.
Yes, there are.
No, there aren’t.
注意： There be 结构中，一般遵循就近一致原则，be 动词的形式由最靠近它的主语决定。例如：
There is a map, a computer and some books on the desk. 书桌上有一幅地图、一台电脑和一些书。
On the second floor, there are two bedrooms and a small study. 二楼有两间卧室和一间小书房。
Ⅲ. 现在进行时（The present continuous tense）
现在进行时的谓语动词形式为：“be + 动词现在分词，即be v.-ing”( 其中 be 动词的具体
形式为am/is/are)。
1. 现在进行时表示此刻正在发生或进行的动作，常与now、at the moment 等时间状语连
用。例如：
He is sleeping at the moment. 他现在正在睡觉。
2. 表示当前一段时间内的活动或现阶段正在进行的动作。例如：
I’m studying in a high school. 我在一所高中上学。
3. 某些动词的现在进行时还可以表示将来，具有“意图”“安排”或“打算”的含义，并
且可以与表示将来的时间状语连用。例如：
The bus is coming. 车来了。（车正往这边行驶，但还未开到跟前）
动词-ing 的构成形式如下：
规则
原形
-ing形式
一般在动词原形末尾加-ing
wash catch
washing catching
以不发音字母e 结尾的动词，先去掉e, 再加-ing
make ride
making riding
以重读闭音节结尾的动词，如果末尾只有一个辅
音字母，应先双写这个字母，再加-ing
sit get
sitting getting
Tapescripts
118
Tapescripts
听力文本
Unit 1 Let’s Be Friends!
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
Kangkang: Hi, I’m Kangkang. What’s your name?
Zhao Lin: My name is Zhao Lin.
Kangkang: What do you like?
Zhao Lin: I like dancing.
Kangkang: What’s your student number?
Zhao Lin: It’s 202474018.
Pronunciation Activity 3
f Y C r n Q z W L e o j
Oral Communication Activity 1
Li Ming: Hello, I’m Li Ming. I’m from Beijing. I’m in Class 6, Grade 7. Which class are you in?
Meimei: Hello, I’m Meimei, and I’m in Class 7. I’m from Tianjin.
Li Ming: I’m 13 years old. What about you, Meimei?
Meimei: I’m 12 years old. I like cooking. What do you like?
Li Ming: I like swimming. Meimei, who is the boy over there?
Meimei: He is my friend, Lin Hua. He is 13 years old. He’s from Wuhan.
Li Ming: Which class is he in?
Meimei: He is in Class 3.
Li Ming: What does he like?
Meimei: He likes running.
Review Activity 1
Here is a photo of my new friends and me.
This boy is Yang Guang. He is from Beijing. He likes reading.
This girl is Chen Lili. She is from Shanghai. She likes hiking.
This boy is Xiao Ming. He is from Tianjin. He likes playing football.
This girl is me. My name is Xiaoxiao. I’m from Beijing. I like drawing.
Tapescripts 119
Unit 2 Meet My Family!
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
Kangkang:
Wang Junfeng, is this a photo of your family?
Wang Junfeng: Yes, it is.
Kangkang:
Is your mother a nurse?
Wang Junfeng: No, she isn’t. She is a doctor, but my aunt is a nurse.
Kangkang:
Great. What does your father do?
Wang Junfeng: He is a worker in a factory.
Kangkang:
Who is that man?
Wang Junfeng: He is my uncle. He is a teacher.
Pronunciation Activity 3
gate dad pet get bee tab date Kate
Oral Communication Activity 1
Lingling: Li Xiang, this is my family photo.
Li Xiang: What does your father do, Lingling?
Lingling: He is a driver.
Li Xiang: How about your mother?
Lingling: She is a policewoman.
Li Xiang: Do you often help your parents do chores?
Lingling: Yes, we do. I often help my father do the cooking. My brother usually helps my mother
clean up.
Li Xiang: What do you do on weekends?
Lingling: We visit our grandparents. We eat and talk together.
Li Xiang: Sounds great!
Review Activity 1
I have four cousins. They work in different cities. Li Jun works in Beijing as a cook. Wang Jing works
in Fuzhou, and she is a doctor. Zhang Tao drives a bus in Shenzhen. Wang Linlin teaches English in a
high school in Nanjing. She is a very good teacher.
Unit 3 Our Colorful School Life
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
Kangkang: Xiao Ya, what time is it now?
Xiao Ya:
It’s ten twenty. I have a biology class at ten thirty. It’s my favorite subject. What about you?
Kangkang: I like history best.
Tapescripts
120
Xiao Ya:
When do you have the history class?
Kangkang: It’s at half past two on Thursday afternoon.
Oral Communication Activity 1
Miss Wang: Can I help you?
Zhou Hua: I can’t find my schoolbag. It’s yellow.
Miss Wang: I see. What’s your name, please?
Zhou Hua: My name is Zhou Hua. My name card is in the schoolbag. You can see my name on it.
Miss Wang: What other things are there in your schoolbag?
Zhou Hua: There is a ping-pong ball in it. Mmm ... There are also two books, a math book and a
science book.
Miss Wang: Let me have a look in my office. (After one minute) This is your schoolbag. I find it next
to the computer.
Zhou Hua: Thanks!
Review Activity 1
Yang Peng: Hi, Lingling, what club are you in?
Lingling:
I’m in the Art Club.
Yang Peng: How often do you go to the club?
Lingling:
Every Friday, at three thirty-five in the afternoon.
Yang Peng: It’s OK. I’m in the PE Club.
Lingling:
How often do you go there?
Yang Peng: At four o’clock every Tuesday afternoon.
Lingling:
What’s your favorite sport in your club?
Yang Peng: Basketball. What’s your favorite, Lingling?
Lingling:
My favorite is drawing.
Unit 4 Fun in the Sun!
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
Kangkang: Which season do you like best, Miss Wang?
Miss Wang: I like summer best.
Kangkang: Why?
Miss Wang: Because I can go swimming in summer.
Kangkang: What’s the weather like in summer in Canada?
Miss Wang: It is hot. Sometimes it rains.
Oral Communication Activity 1
Xiao Ya: Look! There are many old people doing Tai Chi in the park.
Tapescripts 121
Li Xiang: It’s a very good exercise.
Xiao Ya: Are you good at playing Tai Chi?
Li Xiang: No, I’m not. But my grandfather does it well.
Xiao Ya: Does he do Tai Chi every day?
Li Xiang: Yes, he does. He does Tai Chi with his friends every morning.
Xiao Ya: It’s so cold in winter, but they are doing it outdoors.
Li Xiang: They do it in all seasons. It helps them keep healthy.
Review Activity 1
The summer holiday is coming. When you plan to travel, you’d better know about the weather in
different places in August.
In England, it is warm and rains a lot. You need to take an umbrella when you go out.
In Australia, it’s winter in August, but it’s not very cold. So it’s the best time to go there. You need to
take some warm clothes.
In most places of China, it is very hot. It’s sunny. You may need to take a cap and a pair of shorts.
Unit 5 Love Mother Nature!
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
In some places, there is grass and some trees. Horses and sheep live there. What is it?
It’s grassland.
Oral Communication Activity 1
(In a biology class, Miss Zhou is talking about trees with her students.)
Miss Zhou: We can see trees everywhere. And they are important for people and animals. What do
you think of trees, Kangkang?
Kangkang: Trees can bring us clean air. With no air, people and animals can’t live.
Miss Zhou: Great! What about you, Lingling?
Lingling:
Trees can give home to many wild animals. Some wild animals can live in the trees and
eat the fruit of the trees.
Miss Zhou: What about you, Li Xiang?
Li Xiang: Em ... People also need trees for many things in their life. People can use trees to make
tables, chairs and paper. Trees are useful to all of us.
Miss Zhou: And don’t forget we can also have a good rest under a tree in summer.
Review Activity 1
There are many highlands in our country. Now, let’s have a look at the highlands in the pictures.
In the first picture, we can see many high mountains. There is snow on the mountains all year long,
Tapescripts
122
so it’s very cold and windy here.
The second picture is also about a kind of highland. We can see a forest of stones in it. The stone
forest also stands on a highland.
Oh, here in the third picture is a grassland. It’s also on a highland. There are many cows and sheep
here.
The highland in the last picture is a little different. The earth is yellow, and it is very dry. The wind
takes away much earth from the highland every year.
Unit 6 Celebrating the Big Days
Listening & Speaking Activity 2
May 1st is Labor Day. It is a holiday for workers in the world. On this day, most people like to go
traveling with their family and friends, and some people just like to stay at home and enjoy the free
time.
Pronunciation Activity 3
cow toy fear bear sure travel dream dish pleasure watch age
Oral Communication Activity 1
Michael:
Kangkang, why are there so many national flags on the streets?
Kangkang: You know, today is October 1st. It’s our National Day.
Michael:
I see. You put the flags on the streets to celebrate the big day.
Kangkang: Yes. People also raise the national flag at Tian’anmen Square.
Michael:
That’s fun! I’m sure a lot of people like to watch this at Tian’anmen.
Kangkang: You’re right. People also watch this on TV all over the country.
Michael:
Look! Some people are putting flowers on the sides of streets.
Kangkang: Yes. The flowers make the streets so beautiful! Everybody is happy to see the flowers on
National Day.
Review Activity 1
Welcome to our program. Let’s talk about some festivals in the world. In February, people in New
Zealand have an important festival, their National Day. There are many activities, such as boat games
and music shows. In March, Russia has an interesting festival. People there make many pancakes at
home and then celebrate the festival on the streets. On May 1st, people in France give their friends a
kind of small and white flowers. People believe the flowers can bring them luck and love.
Pronunciation Skills 123
Pronunciation Skills
语音技巧
1. 音素（Phoneme）
音素是最小的语音单位。英语音素有元音和辅音两种，共有48 个音素，其中元音20 个，
辅音28 个。
Vowels
/i/ /I/ /e/ /æ/ // /9/ /7/ // /D/ /u/ // //
/aI/ /eI/ /a/ /9/ /I/ /I9/ /e9/ /9/
Consonants
/p/ /b/ /t/ /d/ /k/ /G/
/f/ /v/ /F/ // /s/ /z/ // /E/ /r/ /h/
/ts/ /dz/ /tr/ /dr/ /t/ /dE/
/m/ /n/ /M/
/l/
/j/ /w/
2. 音节（Syllable）
音节由音素组成。元音是构成音节的主体，英语中一个音节可以只由一个元音构成，如
/aI/；也可以由一个元音和若干个辅音构成，如/mi/、/æm/ 和/teIk/ 等。
一般来说，一个元音可以构成一个音节，但较响亮的辅音/l/、/m/、/n/ 在后面没有元音时，
与它前面的辅音也可以构成一个音节，称为成节音，如apple 中的/pl/ 和lesson 中的/sn/。
音节有开音节和闭音节之分。开音节是以发音的元音字母结尾的重读音节，如no、she；
或是以“元音字母 + 辅音字母（r 除外） + 不发音的ｅ”结尾的重读音节，如name、like。闭
音节指的是以辅音字母结尾的重读音节（r 除外）。
五个元音字母在开音节和闭音节中的发音如下表所示：
元音字母
Aa
Ee
Ii
Oo
Uu
开音节
/eI/
/i/
/aI/
/9/
/ju/
face
name
she
these
hi
like
hello
hope
duty
cute
闭音节
/æ/
/e/
/I/
/D/
/7/
//
map
desk
is
box
bus
put
Pronunciation Skills
124
3. 连读（Liaison）
在同一个意群中，前一个单词末尾的音和后一个单词词首的音有时可连起来读，这
种现象称为连读。连读现象是在语言交际中，随着语速的加快而自然产生的，可用符号
“
”表示。常见的连读情况有：
1）辅音+ 元音
如果前一个词以辅音结尾，后一个词以元音开头，这两个词可以连读。例如：
Take a look at it.
2）r/re + 元音
如果前一个词的词尾是r 或者re，后一个词以元音开头，这两个词可以连读，中间增加
一个/r/ 音。例如：
There is a tree over there.
3）元音+ 元音
如果前一个词以元音结尾，后一个也以元音开头，这两个词可以连读，中间增加一个很
短的过渡音/j/ 或者/w/。例如：
Please do it.
He asked for a glass of water.
4. 语调（Intonation）
在说话或朗读时声调的抑扬叫作语调。英语的基本语调分为“降调”和“升调”两种，
主要表现为语句末尾语调的降和升，分别用语调符号
（降调）或
（升调）来表示。
1）降调
① 陈述句：I am a student.
② 特殊疑问句：What are you doing?
③ 祈使句：Take it.
④ 感叹句：What a lovely day!
2）升调
① 一般疑问句：Are you from America?
② 选择疑问句的前一部分：Would you like coffee or tea?
③ 表示列举或命名的句子中的前一部分：Let’s count: one, two, three, four, and five.
Words in Each Unit 125
ＷｏｒｄｓｉｎＥａｃｈＵｎｉｔ
注：星号词为小学阶段已学过的二级词，黑体词为《英语课程标准（２０２２
年版）》要求初中阶段应学习和掌握的基本词，白体词为课文中只要求理解的拓
展词。
Ｕｎｉｔ１
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｌｅｔ／ｌｅｔ／ｖ．让；允许
（１）
∗ｂｅ／ｂｉ；ｂｉː／（现在式ａｍ，ａｒｅ，ｉｓ；
过去式ｗａｓ，ｗｅｒｅ；过去分词ｂｅｅｎ；
现在分词ｂｅｉｎｇ）ｖ．成为；是；在；等于（１）
∗ｆｒｉｅｎｄ／ｆｒｅｎｄ／ｎ．朋友
（１）
∗ｈｅｌｌｏ／ｈəˈｌəʊ／ｅｘｃｌ．你好，喂
（２）
∗ｎｉｃｅ／ｎａＩｓ／ａｄｊ．令人愉快的；友好的
（２）
∗ｔｏ／ｔｕː／ｉｎｆ．ｍ．（表示想做的事）；（表示
目的或意图）；（表示结果或原因）
ｐｒｅｐ．向；到
（２）
∗ｍｅｅｔ／ｍｉːｔ／ｖ．结识；遇见
（２）
∗ｙｏｕ／ｊｕː／ｐｒｏｎ．你；你们
（２）
∗ｔｏｏ／ｔｕː／ａｄｖ．也；太；非常
（２）
∗ｇｏｏｄ／ʊｄ／ａｄｊ．令人愉快的；好的；擅长的；
对……有好处；完全的
（２）
∗ｍｏｒｎｉｎｇ／ˈｍɔːｎＩ／；／ˈｍɔːｒｎＩ／ｎ．上午（２）
∗Ｉ／ａＩ／ｐｒｏｎ．我
（２）
∗ｆｉｎｅ／ｆａＩｎ／ａｄｊ．身体好的，健康的；很好
ｖ．对……处以罚款 ｎ．罚款
（２）
∗ｈｏｗ／ｈａʊ／ａｄｖ．怎样；多少，多么
（２）
∗ｄｏ／ｄｕː／ａｕｘ．（用于实义动词前构成
否定句和疑问句） ｖ．做；从事（职业）；
进行（活动）
（２）
∗ｌｉｋｅ／ｌａＩｋ／ｖ．喜欢；想要 ｐｒｅｐ．像；
……怎么样；像……一样
（２）
∗ｓｃｉｅｎｃｅ／ˈｓａＩəｎｓ／ｎ．科学
（２）
∗ｍｙ／ｍａＩ／ｄｅｔ．我的
（２）
∗ｎａｍｅ／ｎｅＩｍ／ｎ．名字 ｖ．给……取名
（２）
∗ｒｅａｄ／ｒｉːｄ／ｖ．阅读；朗读；读到
（２）
∗ｌｏｖｅ／ｌʌｖ／ｖ．，ｎ．喜爱；爱
（２）
ｈｉｋｅ／ｈａＩｋ／ｖ．远足；徒步旅行
（２）
ｅｎｊｏｙ／ＩｎˈｄʒɔＩ／ｖ．享受……的乐趣；喜爱；
欣赏
（２）
∗ｐｌａｙ／ｐｌｅＩ／ｖ．参加比赛；玩耍；演奏
ｎ．戏剧
（２）
∗ｆｏｏｔｂａｌｌ／ˈｆʊｔｂɔːｌ／ｎ．足球运动；足球
（２）
∗ｓｉｎｇ／ｓＩ／ｖ．唱（歌）
（２）
∗Ｍｉｓｓ／ｍＩｓ／ｎ．小姐；女士
（２）
Words in Each Unit
126
∗ｗｈａｔ／ｗɒｔ／；／ｗʌｔ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．什么；
无论什么；多么
（２）
∗ｙｏｕｒ／ｊɔː（ｒ）／；／ｊʊｒ／ｄｅｔ．你的；你们的（２）
∗ｐｌｅａｓｅ／ｐｌｉːｚ／ｅｘｃｌ．请；太好了
（２）
∗ｄａｎｃｅ／ｄːｎｓ／；／ｄæｎｓ／ｖ．跳舞
（３）
∗ｅｌｅｖｅｎ／Ｉˈｌｅｖｎ／ｎｕｍ．十一
（４）
∗ｔｗｅｌｖｅ／ｔｗｅｌｖ／ｎｕｍ．十二
（４）
∗ｔｈｉｒｔｅｅｎ／ˌɜːˈｔｉːｎ／；／ˌɜːｒˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十三
（４）
∗ｆｏｕｒｔｅｅｎ／ˌｆɔːˈｔｉːｎ／；／ˌｆɔːｒˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十四（４）
∗ｆｉｆｔｅｅｎ／ˌｆＩｆˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十五
（４）
∗ｓｉｘｔｅｅｎ／ˌｓＩｋｓˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十六
（４）
∗ｓｅｖｅｎｔｅｅｎ／ˌｓｅｖｎˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十七
（４）
∗ｅｉｇｈｔｅｅｎ／ˌｅＩˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十八
（４）
∗ｎｉｎｅｔｅｅｎ／ˌｎａＩｎˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十九
（４）
∗ｔｗｅｎｔｙ／ˈｔｗｅｎｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．二十
（４）
∗ｈｉ／ｈａＩ／ｅｘｃｌ．你好，嗨
（４）
∗ｔｈｉｓ／ðＩｓ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．这，这个
（４）
∗ｗｈｅｒｅ／ｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ｗｅｒ／ａｄｖ．在哪里
（４）
∗ｆｒｏｍ／ｆｒəｍ／；／ｆｒʌｍ／ｐｒｅｐ．来自；离；
始于；从
（４）
∗ａｎｄ／əｎｄ；æｎｄ／ｃｏｎｊ．和；然后
（４）
∗ｉｎ／Ｉｎ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……中；用；穿着
（４）
∗ｃｌａｓｓ／ｋｌːｓ／；／ｋｌæｓ／ｎ．班级；课；阶层（４）
ｇｒａｄｅ／ｒｅＩｄ／ｎ．年级；成绩等级
（４）
∗ｗｈｉｃｈ／ｗＩｔʃ ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．哪一个，哪一些
（４）
∗ｗｅ／ｗｉː；ｗｉ／ｐｒｏｎ．我们；人们
（４）
ｃｌａｓｓｍａｔｅ／ˈｋｌːｓｍｅＩｔ／；／ˈｋｌæｓｍｅＩｔ／
ｎ．同班同学
（４）
∗ｏｌｄ／əʊｌｄ／ａｄｊ．年纪；结识久的；老的
（４）
∗ｙｅａｒ／ｊＩə（ｒ）／；／ｊＩｒ／ｎ．年龄；年；一年时间
（４）
∗ｓｅｅ／ｓｉː／ｖ．看见；理解；看
（４）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｔａｌｌ／ｔɔːｌ／ａｄｊ．高的；身高
（６）
ｆｒｉｅｎｄｌｙ／ˈｆｒｅｎｄｌｉ／ａｄｊ．友好的；亲切的
（６）
∗ｔｈｒｅｅ／ｒｉː／ｎｕｍ．三
（６）
∗ｓｅｖｅｎ／ˈｓｅｖｎ／ｎｕｍ．七
（６）
∗ｋｉｎｄ／ｋａＩｎｄ／ａｄｊ．友好的 ｎ．种类
（６）
∗ｄｒａｗ／ｄｒɔː／ｖ．画，描绘
（６）
∗ｓｈｏｒｔ／ʃɔːｔ／；／ʃɔːｒｔ／ａｄｊ．个子矮的；
短暂的；短的
（６）
∗ｓｔｒｏｎｇ／ｓｔｒɒ／；／ｓｔｒɔː／ａｄｊ．强壮的
（６）
∗ｔｈｉｎ／Ｉｎ／ａｄｊ．瘦的；薄的
（６）
∗ｒｕｎ／ｒʌｎ／ｖ．跑步；跑
（６）
∗ｃｏｏｋ／ｋʊｋ／ｖ．烹饪，烹调 ｎ．厨师
（６）
∗ｈｅｌｐｆｕｌ／ˈｈｅｌｐｆｌ／ａｄｊ．愿意帮忙的；有帮助的
（６）
∗ｑｕｉｅｔ／ˈｋｗａＩəｔ／ａｄｊ．文静的；安静的
（６）
∗ａｌｌ／ɔːｌ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．所有，全部
（７）
ｎｅｅｄ／ｎｉːｄ／ｖ．需要；有必要 ｍｏｄａｌｖ．，ｎ．需要
（７）
∗ｃａｎ／ｋəｎ；ｋæｎ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．可以；能，会
（７）
∗ｙｏｕｎｇ／ｊʌ／ａｄｊ．年轻的；幼小的；青年的
（７）
ｔｏｇｅｔｈｅｒ／ｔəˈｅðə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．在一起；共同（７）
∗ｈｅｌｐ／ｈｅｌｐ／ｖ．，ｎ．帮助
（７）
ｅａｃｈ／ｉːｔʃ ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．各个，每个
（７）
ｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈʌðə（ｒ）／ｐｒｏｎ．，ａｄｊ．另外；另一个（７）
Words in Each Unit 127
∗ｈｅ／ｈｉ；ｈｉː／ｐｒｏｎ．他
（７）
∗ｏｆｔｅｎ／ˈɒｆｎ／；／ˈɔːｆｎ／ａｄｖ．时常；往往
（７）
∗ｗｈｏ／ｈｕː／ｐｒｏｎ．谁
（８）
∗ｂｅｓｔ／ｂｅｓｔ／ａｄｊ．最好的 ａｄｖ．最
ｎ．最好的事物（或人）；最高标准
（８）
∗ｓｈｅ／ʃｉ；ʃｉː／ｐｒｏｎ．她
（８）
∗ｓｉｘ／ｓＩｋｓ／ｎｕｍ．六
（８）
∗ｈｅｒｅ／ｈＩə（ｒ）／；／ｈＩｒ／ａｄｖ．（给某人东西
或指出某物时说）；在这里
（８）
∗ｃｕｔｅ／ｋｊｕːｔ／ａｄｊ．可爱的；漂亮迷人的
（８）
∗ｔｈｅ／ðｉː；ðə ／ａｒｔ．（用以泛指）；（解说时用）
（８）
ｇｕｉｔａｒ／ｇＩˈｔː（ｒ）／ｎ．吉他
（８）
∗ｎｅｗ／ｎｊｕː／；／ｎｕː／ａｄｊ．初来乍到的；
不熟悉的；新的；有别于从前的
（８）
∗ｖｅｒｙ／ˈｖｅｒｉ／ａｄｖ．很，非常
（８）
∗ｈａｐｐｙ／ˈｈæｐｉ／ａｄｊ．高兴的；幸福的；
（表示祝愿）；乐意（做某事）
（８）
∗ａｔ／æｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．在（某处）；在（某时间）；在（表
示学习或工作地点）；在……方面；向
（８）
∗ｓｃｈｏｏｌ／ｓｋｕːｌ／ｎ．学校；上学；上课时间（８）
∗ｍｕｓｉｃ／ˈｍｊｕːｚɪｋ／ｎ．音乐；音乐创作
（９）
∗ｈａｖｅ／ｈæｖ／（ｈａｓ／ｈæｚ／，是ｈａｖｅ的第三
人称单数形式）ｖ．有；吃；经历
（９）
∗ｔｈｅｙ／ðｅＩ／ｐｒｏｎ．他们；她们；它们
（９）
∗ｉｔ／Ｉｔ／ｐｒｏｎ．它
（１０）
∗ａ／ə；ｅＩ／（ａｎ／əｎ；æｎ／）ａｒｔ．一（人、
事、物）；（表示为某一群体或职业
中的一员）；任何一，每一
（１０）
∗ｄｏｇ／ｄɒ／；／ｄɔː／ｎ．狗
（１０）
∗ｔｗｏ／ｔｕː／ｎｕｍ．二
（１０）
∗ｂｉｇ／ｂＩ／ａｄｊ．大的；年纪较长的；大受
欢迎的
（１０）
∗ｅａｒ／Ｉə（ｒ）／；／Ｉｒ／ｎ．耳；耳朵
（１０）
∗ｃａｔ／ｋæｔ／ｎ．猫
（１０）
∗ｌｉｔｔｌｅ／ˈｌＩｔｌ／ａｄｊ．小的；年幼的；可怜的
ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．不多的；少量的
（１０）
∗ｂｌａｃｋ／ｂｌæｋ／ａｄｊ．黑色的 ｎ．黑色
（１０）
∗ｏｎｅ／ｗʌｎ／ｎｕｍ．，ｄｅｔ．一；一个
ｐｒｏｎ．其中的一个人（或事物）
（１０）
∗ｌｉｓｔｅｎ／ˈｌＩｓｎ／ｖ．听
（１０）
∗ｌｏｖｅｌｙ／ˈｌʌｖｌｉ／ａｄｊ．美丽的；迷人的
（１０）
∗ｂｒｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈｂｒʌðə（ｒ）／ｎ．哥哥；弟弟
（１０）
∗ｙｅｓ／ｊｅｓ／ｅｘｃｌ．（答话时表示正确或真实）；
（表示同意所说的话）；（接受提议或
邀请）
（１１）
∗ｔｈａｔ／ðæｔ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．那，那个
（１１）
∗ｂｏｙ／ｂɔＩ／ｎ．男孩
（１１）
∗ｏｕｒ／ː（ｒ）；ˈａʊə（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．我们的
（１１）
∗ｎｏ／ｎəʊ／ｅｘｃｌ．不；没有；不是
ｄｅｔ．没有；不准
（１１）
∗ｎｏｔ／ｎɒｔ／；／ｎːｔ／ａｄｖ．不，没有
（１１）
ｙｏｕｒｓｅｌｆ／ｊɔːˈｓｅｌｆ／；／ｊɔːｒˈｓｅｌｆ／（ｐｌ．ｙｏｕｒｓｅｌｖｅｓ
／ｊɔːˈｓｅｌｖｚ／；／ｊɔːｒˈｓｅｌｖｚ／）ｐｒｏｎ．你自己
（１１）
∗ａｇｅ／ｅɪｄʒ／ｎ．年龄；时代
（１１）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｓｗｉｍ／ｓｗＩｍ／ｖ．游泳；游动
（１２）
∗ｇｉｒｌ／ɜːｌ／；／ɜːｒｌ／ｎ．女孩
（１２）
ｅｖｅｒｙｏｎｅ／ˈｅｖｒｉｗʌｎ／（ｅｖｅｒｙｂｏｄｙ／ˈｅｖｒｉｂɒｄｉ／；
Words in Each Unit
128
／ˈｅｖｒｉｂːｄｉ／）ｐｒｏｎ．每人
（１３）
∗ｈｅｒ／ｈə（ｒ）；ｈɜː（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．她的 ｐｒｏｎ．她
（１３）
∗ｂｅａｕｔｉｆｕｌ／ˈｂｊｕːｔＩｆｌ／ａｄｊ．美丽的；美好的（１３）
∗ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ／ˈｐＩｋｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．图画；照片
ｖ．想象
（１３）
∗ｂｏｏｋ／ｂʊｋ／ｎ．书 ｖ．预约，预订
（１３）
∗ａｌｓｏ／ˈɔːｌｓəʊ／ａｄｖ．也；而且
（１３）
∗ｍａｎｙ／ˈｍｅｎｉ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．许多
（１３）
ｔｈｉｎｇ／Ｉ／ｎ．事件；东西
（１３）
ｓｕｃｈ／ｓʌｔʃ ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．这样；这样的，那样的
（１３）
ａｓ／əｚ；æｚ／ｐｒｅｐ．像；作为 ａｄｖ．如同
（１３）
∗ｇｒｅａｔ／ｒｅＩｔ／ａｄｊ．（强调某种情况）；
好极的；优秀的
（１３）
∗ｔｉｍｅ／ｔａＩｍ／ｎ．时间；一段时间；次；时刻（１３）
∗ｗｉｔｈ／ｗɪð；ｗɪ／ｐｒｅｐ．和；有；用
（１３）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｋｎｏｗ／ｎəʊ／ｖ．知道；认识
（１５）
∗ｃａｒｄ／ｋːｄ／；／ｋːｒｄ／ｎ．卡片纸；贺卡（１５）
∗ｔａｌｋ／ｔɔːｋ／ｖ．说话；讨论
（１６）
∗ｍｕｃｈ／ｍʌｔʃ ／ａｄｖ．非常；十分；很
ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．许多，大量
（１６）
∗ｂｕｔ／ｂəｔ；ｂʌｔ／ｃｏｎｊ．相反；然而
（１６）
ｒｅａｌｌｙ／ˈｒｉːəｌｉ；ˈｒＩəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．（加强形容词或
副词的语气）；确实；真正地
（１６）
ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ／ˈｄＩｆｒəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．不同的；各种的（１７）
∗Ｍｒ／ˈｍＩｓｔə（ｒ）／（Ｍｒ．ＡｍＥ）ａｂｂｒ．先生（１７）
∗ｆｏｕｒ／ｆɔː（ｒ）／ｎｕｍ．四
（１７）
Ｕｎｉｔ２
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｆａｍｉｌｙ／ˈｆæｍəｌｉ／ｎ．家庭；亲属
（１９）
∗ｇｒａｎｄｆａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｒæｎｆːðə（ｒ）／（ｇｒａｎｄｐａ
／ˈｇｒæｎｐː／）ｎ．（外）祖父
（２０）
∗ｇｒａｎｄｍｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈｒæｎｍʌðə（ｒ）／（ｇｒａｎｄｍａ
／ˈｇｒæｎｍː／）ｎ．（外）祖母
（２０）
∗ｆａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｆːðə（ｒ）／ｎ．父亲；先驱
（２０）
∗ｍｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈｍʌðə（ｒ）／ｎ．母亲，妈妈
（２０）
∗ｕｎｃｌｅ／ˈʌｋｌ／ｎ．叔；伯；舅；姑父；姨父（２０）
∗ａｕｎｔ／ːｎｔ／；／æｎｔ／ｎ．姑母；姨母；伯母；
婶母；舅母
（２０）
∗ｓｉｓｔｅｒ／ˈｓＩｓｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．姐姐；妹妹
（２０）
∗ｃｏｕｓｉｎ／ˈｋʌｚｎ／ｎ．同辈表亲（或堂亲）（２０）
∗ｓｔｕｄｅｎｔ／ˈｓｔｊｕːｄｎｔ／；／ˈｓｔｕːｄｎｔ／ｎ．学生（２０）
∗ｔｅａｃｈｅｒ／ˈｔｉːｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．教师
（２０）
∗ｍａｎ／ｍæｎ／（ｐｌ．ｍｅｎ／ｍｅｎ／）ｎ．成年男子；
人类
（２０）
∗ａｌｗａｙｓ／ˈɔːｌｗｅＩｚ／ａｄｖ．总是，一直
（２０）
∗ｗｅａｒ／ｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ｗｅｒ／ｖ．穿；戴
（２０）
ｔｉｅ／ｔａＩ／ｎ．领带 ｖ．系；捆绑；打结
（２０）
∗ｗｏｒｋｅｒ／ˈｗɜːｋə（ｒ）／；／ˈｗɜːｒｋəｒ／
ｎ．工人；工作者
（２０）
∗ｄｏｃｔｏｒ／ˈｄɒｋｔə（ｒ）／；／ˈｄːｋｔəｒ／ｎ．医生（２０）
∗ｎｕｒｓｅ／ｎɜːｓ／；／ｎɜːｒｓ／ｎ．护士
（２０）
∗ｗｈｉｔｅ／ｗａＩｔ／ａｄｊ．白色的 ｎ．白色
（２０）
∗ｓｈｉｒｔ／ʃɜːｔ／；／ʃɜːｒｔ／ｎ．衬衫
（２０）
Words in Each Unit 129
∗ｂｕｓ／ｂʌｓ／ｎ．公共汽车
（２０）
∗ｄｒｉｖｅｒ／ˈｄｒａＩｖə（ｒ）／ｎ．司机
（２０）
∗ｗｏｍａｎ／ˈｗʊｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｗｏｍｅｎ／ˈｗＩｍＩｎ／）
ｎ．妇女；女性
（２０）
∗ｂｌｕｅ／ｂｌｕː／ａｄｊ．蓝色的 ｎ．蓝色
（２０）
∗ｄｒｅｓｓ／ｄｒｅｓ／ｎ．连衣裙
（２０）
ｐｏｌｉｃｅｗｏｍａｎ／ｐəˈｌｉːｓｗʊｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｐｏｌｉｃｅｗｏｍｅｎ
／ｐəˈｌｉːｓｗＩｍＩｎ／）ｎ．女警察
（２０）
∗ｙｅｌｌｏｗ／ˈｊｅｌəʊ／ａｄｊ．黄色的 ｎ．黄色
（２０）
∗ｃｈｉｌｄ／ｔʃａＩｌｄ／（ｐｌ．ｃｈｉｌｄｒｅｎ／ˈｔʃɪｌｄｒəｎ／）
ｎ．儿子，女儿；儿童，小孩
（２０）
∗ｐｉｎｋ／ｐＩｋ／ａｄｊ．粉红色的 ｎ．粉红色（２０）
∗ｔｏｙ／ｔɔＩ／ｎ．玩具
（２０）
∗ｒａｂｂｉｔ／ˈｒæｂＩｔ／ｎ．兔
（２０）
ｆａｃｔｏｒｙ／ˈｆæｋｔｒｉ；ˈｆæｋｔəｒｉ／ｎ．工厂
（２２）
∗ｈｏｓｐｉｔａｌ／ˈｈɒｓｐＩｔｌ／；／ˈｈːｓｐＩｔｌ／ｎ．医院（２２）
ｒｅｓｔａｕｒａｎｔ／ˈｒｅｓｔｒɒｎｔ／；／ˈｒｅｓｔｒːｎｔ／ｎ．餐馆；
餐厅
（２２）
∗ｗｏｒｋ／ｗɜːｋ／；／ｗɜːｒｋ／ｖ．从事……工作；
运转 ｎ．工作；作品
（２２）
∗ｐｅｏｐｌｅ／ˈｐｉːｐｌ／ｎ．（ｐｌ．）人；人们；国民（２２）
∗ｔｈｅｒｅ／ðｅə（ｒ）／；／ðｅｒ／ａｄｖ．（表示存在或
发生）；在那里
（２２）
∗ｐｈｏｔｏ／ˈｆəʊｔəʊ／（ｐｈｏｔｏｇｒａｐｈ／ˈｆəʊｔəｇｒːｆ／；
／ˈｆəʊｔəｇｒæｆ／）ｎ．照片
（２２）
∗ｏｆ／əｖ／；／ʌｖ／ｐｒｅｐ．属于……的；关于（某人）
（２２）
∗ＰＥ／ˌｐｉː ˈｉː／（ｐｈｙｓｉｃａｌｅｄｕｃａｔｉｏｎ）
ｎ．体育（课）
（２２）
ｔｅａｃｈ／ｔｉːｔʃ ／ｖ．教授；教导；教
（２２）
∗ｕｓ／ʌｓ；əｓ／ｐｒｏｎ．我们
（２２）
∗ｅｉｇｈｔ／ｅＩｔ／ｎｕｍ．八
（２２）
∗ｓｏ／ｓəʊ／ａｄｖ．如此，极；那么；这样
ｃｏｎｊ．所以
（２２）
ｐｒｅｔｔｙ／ˈｐｒＩｔｉ／ａｄｊ．漂亮的；美观的
ａｄｖ．相当；非常
（２２）
ｏｎｌｙ／ˈəʊｎｌｉ／ａｄｖ．只有；仅；只不过
ａｄｊ．仅有的；最适当的
（２２）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｂｕｓｙ／ˈｂＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．忙碌的；全身心忙于某事
（２４）
∗ｏｎ／ɒｎ／；／ːｎ／ｐｒｅｐ．在（某一天）；
在……上；通过；关于
（２４）
∗Ｓａｔｕｒｄａｙ／ˈｓæｔəｄｅＩ／；／ˈｓæｔəｒｄｅＩ／ｎ．星期六
（２４）
∗ｂａｓｋｅｔｂａｌｌ／ˈｂːｓｋＩｔｂɔːｌ／；／ˈｂæｓｋＩｔｂɔːｌ／
ｎ．篮球运动；篮球
（２４）
ｎｏｏｎ／ｎｕːｎ／ｎ．正午，中午
（２４）
∗ａｆｔｅｒｎｏｏｎ／ˌːｆｔəˈｎｕːｎ／；／ˌæｆｔəｒˈｎｕːｎ／
ｎ．下午
（２４）
∗ｐａｒｅｎｔ／ˈｐｅəｒəｎｔ／；／ˈｐｅｒəｎｔ／ｎ．父亲；母亲
（２４）
∗ｖｉｓｉｔ／ˈｖＩｚＩｔ／ｖ．访问；参观
（２４）
ｇｒａｎｄｐａｒｅｎｔ／ˈｇｒæｎｐｅəｒəｎｔ／；／ˈｇｒæｎｐｅｒəｎｔ／
ｎ．祖父；祖母；外祖父；外祖母
（２４）
∗ｅａｔ／ｉːｔ／ｖ．吃饭；吃
（２４）
∗ｗａｔｃｈ／ｗɒｔʃ ／；／ｗːｔʃ ／ｖ．观看；关注
（２４）
∗ＴＶ／ˌｔｉː ˈｖｉː／（ｔｅｌｅｖｉｓｉｏｎ／ˈｔｅｌＩｖＩʒｎ／）ｎ．电视
（２４）
∗ｃｈｏｒｅ／ｔʃɔː（ｒ）／ｎ．日常事务；例行工作（２４）
Words in Each Unit
130
∗ｇｏ／əʊ／ｖ．去；出发；去从事
（２４）
∗ｐａｒｋ／ｐːｋ／；／ｐːｒｋ／ｎ．公园 ｖ．停（车）
（２４）
∗ｓｈｏｐ／ʃɒｐ／；／ʃːｐ／ｖ．去商店买 ｎ．商店
（２４）
∗ｗａｌｋ／ｗɔːｋ／ｖ．遛；步行 ｎ．散步
（２４）
∗ｌｉｖｅ／ｌＩｖ／ｖ．居住；生活
（２５）
∗ｓｍａｌｌ／ｓｍɔːｌ／ａｄｊ．小的；年幼的
（２５）
∗ｈｉｓ／ｈɪｚ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．他的
（２５）
∗ｈｉｍ／ｈＩｍ／ｐｒｏｎ．他
（２５）
∗ｓｏｍｅ／ｓʌｍ／ｄｅｔ．一些；某些
ｐｒｏｎ．有些人，有些事物
（２５）
ｍｏｓｔ／ｍəʊｓｔ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．大多数 ａｄｖ．最
（２５）
∗ｔｈｅｉｒ／ðｅə（ｒ）／；／ðｅｒ／ｄｅｔ．他们的；
她们的；它们的
（２５）
ｔｅｘｔ／ｔｅｋｓｔ／ｎ．文章；文本，正文；课本
（２５）
∗ａｂｏｕｔ／əˈｂａʊｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．关于 ａｄｖ．大约
（２５）
∗ｔｒｅｅ／ｔｒｉː／ｎ．树木
（２５）
∗ｓｈｏｗ／ʃəʊ／ｖ．展示；教；表明 ｎ．（电视或
广播）节目
（２５）
∗ａｆｔｅｒ／ˈːｆｔə（ｒ）／；／ˈæｆｔəｒ／
ｐｒｅｐ．，ｃｏｎｊ．在……后
（２６）
∗ｔｈｅｍ／ðｅｍ；ðəｍ／ｐｒｏｎ．他们；她们；它们
（２６）
ｗｅｅｋｅｎｄ／ˌｗｉːｋˈｅｎｄ／；／ˈｗｉːｋｅｎｄ／ｎ．周末（２６）
∗ｄｉｎｎｅｒ／ˈｄＩｎə（ｒ）／ｎ．正餐，主餐
（２６）
ｓｏｍｅｔｈｉｎｇ／ˈｓʌｍＩ／ｐｒｏｎ．某事；某物
（２６）
∗ｆｏｒ／ｆə（ｒ）；ｆɔː（ｒ）／ｐｒｅｐ．为得到；给；
为了；（表示目的或功能）；因为
（２６）
∗ｆｏｏｄ／ｆｕːｄ／ｎ．食物
（２６）
ｓｅｔ／ｓｅｔ／ｖ．摆放餐具；设置；安排
ｎ．电视机；一套；一组
（２６）
∗ｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｔｅＩｂｌ／ｎ．桌子；表
（２６）
∗ｃｌｅａｎ／ｋｌｉːｎ／ｖ．打扫 ａｄｊ．干净的；清新的
（２６）
∗ｕｐ／ʌｐ／ａｄｖ．，ｐｒｅｐ．彻底；向上
（２６）
∗ｊｏｂ／ｄʒɒｂ／；／ｄʒːｂ／ｎ．工作
（２８）
∗ｗｈｏｓｅ／ｈｕːｚ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．谁的
（２８）
∗ｉｔｓ／Ｉｔｓ／ｄｅｔ．（指事物、动物或婴儿）
它的，他的，她的
（２８）
∗Ｍｒｓ／ˈｍＩｓＩｚ／（Ｍｒｓ．ＡｍＥ）ａｂｂｒ．夫人（２８）
ｓｏｎ／ｓʌｎ／ｎ．儿子
（２８）
ｒｉｄｅ／ｒａＩｄ／ｖ．骑；驾驶
（２８）
∗ｂｉｋｅ／ｂａＩｋ／（ｂｉｃｙｃｌｅ／ˈｂａＩｓＩｋｌ／）ｎ．自行车
（２８）
∗ｗｅｌｌ／ｗｅｌ／ａｄｖ．好 ｎ．井，水井
（２９）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｏｒ／ɔː（ｒ）／ｃｏｎｊ．或者；或者说；否则
（３０）
∗ｍｅ／ｍｉ；ｍｉː／ｐｒｏｎ．（Ｉ的宾格）我
（３１）
∗ｔｅｌｌ／ｔｅｌ／ｖ．告诉；识别；说
（３１）
∗ｓｐｏｒｔ／ｓｐɔːｔ／；／ｓｐɔːｒｔ／ｎ．体育运动
（３１）
∗ｓｏｍｅｔｉｍｅｓ／ˈｓʌｍｔａＩｍｚ／ａｄｖ．有时
（３１）
∗ｆｉｌｍ／ｆｉｌｍ／ｎ．电影；影片
（３１）
∗ｈｏｍｅ／ｈəʊｍ／ｎ．家；栖息地 ａｄｖ．在家（３１）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｍｅｍｂｅｒ／ˈｍｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．成员；会员
（３３）
ａｃｔｉｖｉｔｙ／æｋˈｔＩｖəｔｉ／ｎ．活动
（３３）
∗ｍａｔｈｓ／ｍæｓ／（ｍａｔｈ／ｍæ／ＡｍＥ）ｎ．数学
（３４）
Words in Each Unit 131
∗ｓｔｕｄｙ／ˈｓｔʌｄｉ／ｖ．学习 ｎ．学习；书房
（３４）
∗ｈａｒｄ／ｈːｄ／；／ｈːｒｄ／ａｄｖ．努力地
ａｄｊ．难做的；艰难的；努力的
（３４）
∗ｍｉｄｄｌｅ／ˈｍＩｄｌ／ａｄｊ．中间的 ｎ．中间
（３４）
∗ｅｖｅｒｙ／ˈｅｖｒｉ／ｄｅｔ．每一个；每逢
（３４）
∗ｄａｙ／ｄｅＩ／ｎ．一天；白天
（３４）
∗ｌｏｏｋ／ｌʊｋ／ｖ．显得；看；好像是 ｎ．看；相貌（３４）
ｈｉｇｈ／ｈａＩ／ａｄｊ．高的 ａｄｖ．高；在高处
（３５）
∗ｌｏｔ／ｌɒｔ／；／ｌːｔ／ａｄｖ．（与动词连用）非常
ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．大量，许多
（３５）
Ｕｎｉｔ３
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｃｏｌｏｕｒｆｕｌ／ˈｋʌｌəｆｌ／；／ˈｋʌｌəｒｆｌ／（ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌＡｍＥ）
ａｄｊ．丰富多彩的；五彩缤纷的
（３７）
ｌｉｆｅ／ｌａɪｆ／（ｐｌ．ｌｉｖｅｓ／ｌａＩｖｚ／）ｎ．生活；生命（３７）
ｂｉｏｌｏｇｙ／ｂａＩˈɒｌəｄʒｉ／；／ｂａＩˈːｌəｄʒｉ／ｎ．生物学
（３８）
∗Ｃｈｉｎｅｓｅ／ˌｔʃａＩˈｎｉːｚ／ｎ．汉语；中国人
ａｄｊ．中国的
（３８）
ｇｅｏｇｒａｐｈｙ／ｄʒｉˈɒｇｒəｆｉ／；／ｄʒｉˈːｇｒəｆｉ／
ｎ．地理（学）
（３８）
∗ａｒｔ／ːｔ／；／ːｒｔ／ｎ．美术，艺术
（３８）
ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ／ˈｈＩｓｔｒｉ／ｎ．历史课；地方志；历史（３８）
∗ｃｏｍｐｕｔｅｒ／ｋəｍˈｐｊｕːｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．电脑
（３８）
∗Ｗｅｄｎｅｓｄａｙ／ˈｗｅｎｚｄｅＩ；ˈｗｅｎｚｄｉ／ｎ．星期三
（３８）
∗Ｅｎｇｌｉｓｈ／ˈＩｌＩʃ／ｎ．英语学科；英语；英格兰人
ａｄｊ．英格兰的；英格兰人的；英语的（３８）
∗ｂｅｇｉｎ／ｂＩˈＩｎ／ｖ．开始
（３８）
∗ｏｃｌｏｃｋ／əˈｋｌɒｋ／；／əˈｋｌːｋ／ａｄｖ．（表示
整点）……点钟
（３８）
∗ｔｅｎ／ｔｅｎ／ｎｕｍ．十
（３８）
∗ｈａｌｆ／ｈːｆ／；／ｈæｆ／ｎ．一半
（３８）
ｐａｓｔ／ｐːｓｔ／；／ｐæｓｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……之后
ｎ．过去 ａｄｊ．从前的；刚过去的
（３８）
∗ｏｖｅｒ／ˈəʊｖə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．结束；穿过；又
ｐｒｅｐ．遍及；在……上面；穿越
（３８）
ｑｕａｒｔｅｒ／ˈｋｗɔːｔə（ｒ）／；／ˈｋｗɔːｒｔəｒ／ｎ．一刻钟；
四分之一；季度
（３８）
∗ｎｏｗ／ｎａʊ／ａｄｖ．现在；目前
（３８）
∗ｆａｖｏｕｒｉｔｅ／ˈｆｅＩｖəｒＩｔ／（ｆａｖｏｒｉｔｅＡｍＥ）
ａｄｊ．特别受喜爱的 ｎ．特别喜爱的人
（或事物）
（３９）
∗ｓｕｂｊｅｃｔ／ˈｓʌｂｄʒＩｋｔ；ˈｓʌｂｄʒｅｋｔ／ｎ．科目
（３９）
∗Ｔｈｕｒｓｄａｙ／ˈɜːｚｄｅＩ／；／ˈɜːｒｚｄｅＩ／ｎ．星期四
（３９）
∗ｂｙ／ｂａＩ／ｐｒｅｐ．（表示方式）；（表示施事者）；
在……旁边；在……之前
（４０）
ｕｎｄｅｒｇｒｏｕｎｄ／ˈʌｎｄəｇｒａʊｎｄ／；／ˈʌｎｄəｒｇｒａʊｎｄ／
ｎ．地铁
（４０）
∗ｐｌａｎｅ／ｐｌｅＩｎ／ｎ．飞机
（４０）
∗ｆｏｏｔ／ｆʊｔ／（ｐｌ．ｆｅｅｔ／ｆｉːｔ／）ｎ．脚，足；底部（４０）
∗ｃａｒ／ｋː（ｒ）／ｎ．小汽车；轿车
（４０）
∗ｔｒａｉｎ／ｔｒｅＩｎ／ｎ．火车 ｖ．训练；培训
（４０）
∗ｓｈｉｐ／ʃＩｐ／ｎ．（大）船 ｖ．运输
（４０）
∗ｂｏａｔ／ｂəʊｔ／ｎ．（泛指）船；舟，小船
（４０）
∗ｗａｙ／ｗｅＩ／ｎ．方式；方面；路
（４０）
∗ｓｔｏｐ／ｓｔɒｐ／；／ｓｔːｐ／ｎ．车站；停止
ｖ．停下；阻止；停止
（４０）
Words in Each Unit
132
ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ／ˈｊｕːʒｕəｌｉ；ˈｊｕːʒəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．经常地
（４０）
∗ｃｏｍｅ／ｋʌｍ／ｖ．来；来到
（４０）
∗ｆａｒ／ｆː（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．远
（４０）
∗ｎｅｖｅｒ／ˈｎｅｖə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．从不
（４０）
∗ｔａｋｅ／ｔｅＩｋ／ｖ．乘坐；带去；携带；拍照
（４０）
ｓｅｌｄｏｍ／ˈｓｅｌｄəｍ／ａｄｖ．不常，很少
（４０）
∗ｎｅａｒ／ｎＩə（ｒ）／；／ｎＩｒ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……附近（４０）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｌｉｂｒａｒｙ／ˈｌａＩｂｒəｒｉ／；／ˈｌａＩｂｒｅｒｉ／ｎ．图书馆（４２）
ｂｕｉｌｄｉｎｇ／ˈｂＩｌｄＩ／ｎ．建筑物；楼房
（４２）
∗ｆｌｏｏｒ／ｆｌɔː（ｒ）／ｎ．楼层；地板
（４２）
∗ｆｉｖｅ／ｆａＩｖ／ｎｕｍ．五
（４２）
∗ｐｌａｙｇｒｏｕｎｄ／ˈｐｌｅＩｒａʊｎｄ／ｎ．操场
（４２）
∗ｎｅｘｔ／ｎｅｋｓｔ／ａｄｊ．紧挨着的；下一个的；
接下来的 ａｄｖ．紧接着；随后
（４２）
ｎｅｘｔｔｏｐｒｅｐ．紧邻，在……近旁；紧接
（４２）
∗ｇａｒｄｅｎ／ˈːｄｎ／；／ˈːｒｄｎ／ｎ．花园
（４２）
∗ｆｌｏｗｅｒ／ˈｆｌａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．花，花朵；花卉
（４２）
∗ｔｉｄｙ／ˈｔａＩｄｉ／ａｄｊ．整洁的 ｖ．使整洁
（４２）
ｂｒｉｇｈｔ／ｂｒａＩｔ／ａｄｊ．明亮的；光线充足的
（４２）
ｃｌｕｂ／ｋｌʌｂ／ｎ．俱乐部；社团
（４３）
∗ｏｐｅｎ／ˈəʊｐəｎ／ｖ．开门，开业；打开；睁开；张开
ａｄｊ．开放；敞开的；张开的；展开的
（４３）
ｐ．ｍ．／ˌｐｉːˈｅｍ／ａｂｂｒ．下午，午后
（４３）
∗Ｔｕｅｓｄａｙ／ˈｔｊｕːｚｄｅＩ／；／ˈｔｕːｚｄｅＩ／ｎ．星期二
（４３）
ｈａｌｌ／ｈɔːｌ／ｎ．礼堂，大厅；走廊；门厅
（４３）
∗ｓｏｎｇ／ｓɒ／；／ｓɔː／ｎ．歌曲
（４３）
∗ｐｕｔ／ｐʊｔ／ｖ．放；安置
（４３）
∗Ｆｒｉｄａｙ／ˈｆｒａＩｄｅＩ；ˈｆｒａＩｄｉ／ｎ．星期五
（４３）
∗ｗａｔｅｒ／ˈｗɔːｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．水 ｖ．浇水
（４３）
∗ｇａｍｅ／ｅＩｍ／ｎ．游戏；运动项目；比赛（４３）
ｆｕｎ／ｆʌｎ／ａｄｊ．有趣的 ｎ．乐趣
（４４）
∗Ｍｏｎｄａｙ／ˈｍʌｎｄｅＩ；ˈｍʌｎｄｉ／ｎ．星期一（４４）
ｒａｉｓｅ／ｒｅＩｚ／ｖ．提升，举起；增加；筹募；抚养
（４４）
ｎａｔｉｏｎａｌ／ˈｎæʃｎəｌ／ａｄｊ．国家的；民族的；
全国的
（４４）
ｆｌａｇ／ｆｌæ／ｎ．旗；旗帜
（４４）
ｓｔａｒｔ／ｓｔːｔ／；／ｓｔːｒｔ／ｖ．开始 ｎ．开头
（４４）
∗ｆｉｒｓｔ／ｆɜːｓｔ／；／ｆɜːｒｓｔ／ｄｅｔ．，ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．
第一；首要的 ａｄｖ．首先；第一次
（４４）
ａ．ｍ．／ˌｅＩˈｅｍ／ａｂｂｒ．上午，午前
（４４）
∗ｍａｋｅ／ｍｅＩｋ／ｖ．使成为；出产，写；做；
使变得；使得
（４４）
∗ｈａｎｄ／ｈæｎｄ／ｎ．手；帮助
（４５）
∗ａｎｓｗｅｒ／ˈːｎｓə（ｒ）／；／ˈæｎｓəｒ／ｖ．答复；回答
ｎ．答复，回答；答案
（４５）
∗ｑｕｅｓｔｉｏｎ／ˈｋｗｅｓｔʃəｎ／ｎ．问题
（４５）
∗ｂｏｘ／ｂɒｋｓ／；／ｂːｋｓ／ｎ．盒，箱；方框
（４６）
ｋｎｉｆｅ／ｎａＩｆ／（ｐｌ．ｋｎｉｖｅｓ／ｎａＩｖｚ／）ｎ．刀
（４６）
∗ｇｌａｓｓ／ｇｌːｓ／；／ｇｌæｓ／ｎ．玻璃杯；眼镜；玻璃
（４６）
ｄｉｓｈ／ｄＩʃ ／ｎ．菜肴；餐具
（４６）
∗ｔｏｍａｔｏ／ｔəˈｍːｔəʊ／；／ｔəˈｍｅＩｔəʊ／ｎ．番茄
（４６）
ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ／ˈｋʌｎｔｒｉ／ｎ．国家
（４６）
∗Ａｍｅｒｉｃａｎ／əˈｍｅｒＩｋəｎ／ａｄｊ．美国的
ｎ．美国人
（４６）
ｄｕｒｉｎｇ／ˈｄｊʊəｒＩ／；／ˈｄʊｒＩ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……期间
（４６）
Words in Each Unit 133
∗ｃｌａｓｓｒｏｏｍ／ˈｋｌːｓｒｕːｍ／；／ˈｋｌæｓｒｕːｍ／
ｎ．教室；课堂
（４６）
ｐａｒｔ／ｐːｔ／；／ｐːｒｔ／ｎ．参与；部分
（４６）
ｂｏｔｔｌｅ／ˈｂɒｔｌ／；／ˈｂːｔｌ／ｎ．瓶子
（４７）
∗ａｎｙ／ˈｅｎｉ／ｄｅｔ．任何的，任一的；任一
ｐｒｏｎ．任一；任何数量
（４７）
∗ｊｕｉｃｅ／ｄʒｕːｓ／ｎ．果汁；菜汁
（４７）
∗ｂｌａｃｋｂｏａｒｄ／ˈｂｌæｋｂɔːｄ／；／ˈｂｌæｋｂɔːｒｄ／
ｎ．黑板
（４７）
∗ｄｅｓｋ／ｄｅｓｋ／ｎ．书桌
（４７）
∗ｃｈａｉｒ／ｔʃｅə（ｒ）／；／ｔʃｅｒ／ｎ．椅子
（４７）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｐｅｎｃｉｌ／ˈｐｅｎｓｌ／ｎ．铅笔
（４８）
∗ｒｕｌｅｒ／ˈｒｕːｌə（ｒ）／ｎ．直尺
（４８）
∗ｓｃｈｏｏｌｂａｇ／ˈｓｋｕːｌｂæ／ｎ．书包
（４８）
∗ｐｉｎｇ⁃ｐｏｎｇｎ．乒乓球运动
（４８）
∗ｂａｌｌ／ｂɔːｌ／ｎ．球
（４８）
∗ｆｉｎｄ／ｆａＩｎｄ／ｖ．找到；发现；认为
（４８）
ｌｏｓｔ／ｌɒｓｔ／；／ｌɔːｓｔ／ａｄｊ．丢失的；迷路的
（４８）
∗ｃｏｌｏｕｒ／ˈｋʌｌə（ｒ）／（ｃｏｌｏｒＡｍＥ）ｎ．颜色
ｖ．为……着色
（４８）
ｅｎｄ／ｅｎｄ／ｖ．结束；终止 ｎ．结尾；末端
（４９）
∗ｌｅａｒｎ／ｌɜːｎ／；／ｌɜːｒｎ／ｖ．学习；记住
（４９）
∗ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔｉｎｇ／ˈＩｎｔｒəｓｔＩ；ˈＩｎｔｒｅｓｔＩ／
ａｄｊ．有趣的
（４９）
ｊｏｉｎ／ｄʒɔＩｎ／ｖ．参加；加入
（４９）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｗｅｂ／ｗｅｂ／ｎ．万维网
（５１）
ｐａｇｅ／ｐｅɪｄʒ ／ｎ．页；页面
（５１）
∗ｃｉｔｙ／ˈｓɪｔｉ／ｎ．都市；城市
（５１）
∗ｗｅｌｃｏｍｅ／ˈｗｅｌｋəｍ／ｅｘｃｌ．，ｖ．欢迎
ａｄｊ．受欢迎的
（５１）
∗ｏｕｔ／ａʊｔ／ａｄｖ．（从……里）出来；在外面；
外出
（５１）
ｍｏｒｅ／ｍɔː（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．更多的 ａｄｖ．更（５１）
∗ｗａｎｔ／ｗɒｎｔ／；／ｗːｎｔ／ｖ．想要；需要
（５２）
∗ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ／ｂＩˈｋəｚ／；／ｂＩˈｋɔːｚ／ｃｏｎｊ．因为（５２）
∗ｒｏｏｍ／ｒｕːｍ；ｒʊｍ／ｎ．房间；空间
（５２）
ｗｒｉｔｅｒ／ˈｒａＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．作家
（５３）
∗ａｓｋ／ːｓｋ／；／æｓｋ／ｖ．问，询问；请求
（５３）
Ｕｎｉｔ４
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｓｕｎ／ｓʌｎ／ｎ．太阳；阳光
（５５）
∗ｓｐｒｉｎｇ／ｓｐｒＩ／ｎ．春天；春季
（５６）
∗ｓｕｍｍｅｒ／ˈｓʌｍə（ｒ）／ｎ．夏天；夏季
（５６）
∗ａｕｔｕｍｎ／ˈɔːｔəｍ／ｎ．秋天；秋季
（５６）
∗ｗｉｎｔｅｒ／ˈｗＩｎｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．冬天；冬季
（５６）
∗ｈｏｔ／ｈɒｔ／；／ｈːｔ／ａｄｊ．温度高的；热的（５６）
∗ｃｏｏｌ／ｋｕːｌ／ａｄｊ．凉的；凉爽的；酷的
（５６）
∗ｃｏｌｄ／ｋəʊｌｄ／ａｄｊ．寒冷的 ｎ．感冒
（５６）
∗ｗａｒｍ／ｗɔːｍ／；／ｗɔːｒｍ／ａｄｊ．温暖的；
保暖的；热心的 ｖ．变暖和
（５６）
∗ｓｎｏｗ／ｓｎəʊ／ｖ．下雪 ｎ．雪
（５６）
ｓｎｏｗｍａｎ／ˈｓｎəʊｍæｎ／ｎ．雪人
（５６）
∗ｓｕｎｎｙ／ˈｓʌｎｉ／ａｄｊ．阳光充足的
（５６）
∗ｔｏｄａｙ／ｔəˈｄｅɪ／ａｄｖ．在今天 ｎ．今天；当今（５６）
Words in Each Unit
134
ｐｉｃｎｉｃ／ˈｐＩｋｎＩｋ／ｎ．，ｖ．野餐
（５６）
∗ｗｅａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｗｅðə（ｒ）／ｎ．天气
（５６）
∗ｓｅａｓｏｎ／ˈｓｉːｚｎ／ｎ．季；季节
（５７）
∗ｗｈｙ／ｗａＩ／ａｄｖ．为什么
（５７）
∗ｒａｉｎ／ｒｅＩｎ／ｎ．雨；雨水 ｖ．下雨
（５７）
ｄｒｙ／ｄｒａＩ／ａｄｊ．干燥的；干旱的
（５７）
ｂａｄｍｉｎｔｏｎ／ˈｂæｄｍＩｎｔəｎ／ｎ．羽毛球运动（５８）
ｂａｓｅｂａｌｌ／ˈｂｅＩｓｂɔːｌ／ｎ．棒球运动；棒球
（５８）
∗ｐｈｏｎｅ／ｆəʊｎ／ｎ．电话系统；手机
（５８）
∗ｓｈｏｅ／ʃｕː／ｎ．鞋
（５８）
∗ｓｏｒｒｙ／ˈｓɒｒｉ／；／ˈｓːｒｉ／ｅｘｃｌ．很抱歉
ａｄｊ．歉疚；难过
（５８）
ｈｏｍｅｗｏｒｋ／ˈｈəʊｍｗɜːｋ／；／ˈｈəʊｍｗɜːｒｋ／
ｎ．家庭作业
（５８）
ｈｏｐｅ／ｈəʊｐ／ｖ．，ｎ．希望
（５８）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｙｏ－ｙｏ／ˈｊəʊ ｊəʊ／ｎ．悠悠球
（６０）
∗ｌｏｎｇ／ｌɒ／；／ｌɔː／ａｄｖ．（强调某事发生
在某整段时间）；长期地；长久地
ａｄｊ．长的；长时间的 ｖ．渴望
（６０）
∗ｃｌｏｕｄｙ／ˈｋｌａʊｄｉ／ａｄｊ．阴天的；多云的
（６０）
ｏｕｔｄｏｏｒｓ／ˌａʊｔˈｄɔːｚ／；／ˌａʊｔˈｄɔːｒｚ／
ａｄｖ．在户外；在野外
（６０）
ｒａｉｎｙ／ˈｒｅＩｎｉ／ａｄｊ．阴雨的；多雨的
（６０）
ｉｎｄｏｏｒｓ／ˌＩｎˈｄɔːｚ／；／ˌＩｎˈｄɔːｒｚ／ａｄｖ．在室内（６０）
∗ｅｘｅｒｃｉｓｅ／ˈｅｋｓəｓａＩｚ／；／ˈｅｋｓəｒｓａＩｚ／
ｎ．锻炼；练习 ｖ．锻炼
（６１）
ｈｅａｌｔｈ／ｈｅｌ／ｎ．健康
（６１）
ｔｉｐ／ｔＩｐ／ｎ．实用的提示；小费；尖端
（６１）
∗ｒｉｇｈｔ／ｒａＩｔ／ａｄｊ．适当的；正确的；右边的
ｎ．右边；权利
（６１）
∗ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ／ｋｌəʊðｚ；ｋｌəʊｚ／ｎ．衣服；服装（６１）
ｉｍｐｏｒｔａｎｔ／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｔｎｔ／；／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｒｔｎｔ／
ａｄｊ．重要的
（６１）
∗ｂｅｆｏｒｅ／ｂＩˈｆɔː（ｒ）／ｐｒｅｐ．，ｃｏｎｊ．在……以前（６１）
ｔｅａｍ／ｔｉːｍ／ｎ．队；组
（６２）
∗ｇｉｖｅ／Ｉｖ／ｖ．提供；送给；给
（６２）
∗ｋｅｅｐ／ｋｉːｐ／ｖ．继续；保持；存放；记录（６２）
ｐａｓｓ／ｐːｓ／；／ｐæｓ／ｖ．传球；及格；通过；传递
ｎ．及格
（６２）
∗ｗｉｎ／ｗＩｎ／ｖ．获胜，赢
（６２）
∗ｗｉｓｈ／ｗＩʃ／ｎ．心愿；祝愿 ｖ．希望；祝愿（６２）
∗ｆｅｅｌ／ｆｉːｌ／ｖ．觉得，感到；摸起来
（６２）
∗ｓｔａｒ／ｓｔː（ｒ）／ｎ．明星；星
（６２）
∗ｕｓｅ／ｊｕːｚ／ｖ．使用
（６４）
∗ｇｒａｐｅ／ｇｒｅＩｐ／ｎ．葡萄
（６４）
∗ｆａｓｔ／ｆːｓｔ／；／ｆæｓｔ／ａｄｖ．快；迅速
ａｄｊ．快的；迅速的
（６４）
ｆｅｅｄ／ｆｉːｄ／ｖ．喂养；进食
（６５）
∗ｂｉｒｄ／ｂɜːｄ／；／ｂɜːｒｄ／ｎ．鸟；禽
（６５）
∗ｒｅｄ／ｒｅｄ／ｎ．红色 ａｄｊ．红色的
（６５）
∗ｌａｋｅ／ｌｅＩｋ／ｎ．湖；湖泊
（６５）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ＴａｉＣｈｉ／ˈｔａＩˈｔʃｉː／ｎ．太极
（６６）
∗ｗｈｅｎ／ｗｅｎ／ａｄｖ．何时 ｃｏｎｊ．当……时（６６）
ｓｋｉ／ｓｋｉː／ｖ．滑雪（运动）
（６７）
∗ｈｏｍｅｔｏｗｎ／ˈｈəʊｍｔａʊｎ／ｎ．家乡；故乡（６７）
∗ｔｒａｖｅｌ／ˈｔｒæｖｌ／ｖ．，ｎ．旅行；游历
（６７）
ｍｏｕｎｔａｉｎ／ˈｍａʊｎｔəｎ／；／ˈｍａʊｎｔｎ／ｎ．高山；
山岳
（６７）
Words in Each Unit 135
∗ｔｕｒｎ／ｔɜːｎ／；／ｔɜːｒｎ／ｎ．转弯；机会
ｖ．转弯；转身；翻；成为
（６７）
∗ｍｏｖｅ／ｍｕːｖ／ｖ．移动；搬（家）
（６７）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｓｕｒｖｅｙ／ˈｓɜːｖｅＩ／；／ˈｓɜːｒｖｅＩ／ｎ．民意调查（６９）
∗ｗｅｅｋ／ｗｉːｋ／ｎ．周；一周
（６９）
∗ｈｏｕｒ／ˈａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．小时
（６９）
ｒｅｓｕｌｔ／ｒＩˈｚʌｌｔ／ｎ．结果；后果；成果
（６９）
∗ｃａｐ／ｋæｐ／ｎ．便帽，制服帽
（７０）
∗ｐａｉｒ／ｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｐｅｒ／ｎ．由两个相连接
部分组成的物体；俩；一双
（７０）
∗ｓｈｏｒｔｓ／ʃɔːｔｓ／；／ʃɔːｒｔｓ／ｎ．短裤
（７０）
∗ｚｏｏ／ｚｕː／ｎ．动物园
（７０）
ｗｉｎｄ／ｗＩｎｄ／ｎ．风
（７１）
∗ｌｅｇ／ｌｅｇ／ｎ．有……腿的；腿
（７１）
ｒａｃｅ／ｒｅＩｓ／ｎ．赛跑；速度竞赛
（７１）
ｓｉｄｅ／ｓａＩｄ／ｎ．一边；一侧
（７１）
ｅｖｅｎ／ｉːｖｎ／ａｄｖ．甚至，连；更加
（７１）
∗ｗｒｉｔｅ／ｒａＩｔ／ｖ．书写；写作；写信
（７１）
∗ｄｏｗｎ／ｄａʊｎ／ａｄｖ．（写）在纸上；向下
ｐｒｅｐ．向下；沿着
（７１）
Ｕｎｉｔ５
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｎａｔｕｒｅ／ˈｎｅＩｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．自然界；自然
（７３）
∗ｓｅａ／ｓｉː／ｎ．海；海洋
（７４）
ｄｅｓｅｒｔ／ˈｄｅｚəｔ／；／ˈｄｅｚəｒｔ／ｎ．沙漠
（７４）
ｒａｉｎｆｏｒｅｓｔ／ˈｒｅＩｎｆɒｒＩｓｔ／；／ˈｒｅＩｎｆɔːｒＩｓｔ／
ｎ．（热带）雨林
（７４）
ｗａｔｅｒｆａｌｌ／ˈｗɔːｔəｆɔːｌ／；／ˈｗɔːｔəｒｆɔːｌ／ｎ．瀑布（７４）
ｇｒａｓｓｌａｎｄ／ˈｇｒːｓｌæｎｄ／；／ˈｇｒæｓｌæｎｄ／ｎ．草原
（７４）
ｗｅｔ／ｗｅｔ／ａｄｊ．潮湿的
（７４）
∗ｐｌａｎｔ／ｐｌːｎｔ／；／ｐｌæｎｔ／ｎ．植物 ｖ．种植（７４）
∗ａｎｉｍａｌ／ˈæｎＩｍｌ／ｎ．动物
（７４）
ｆａｌｌ／ｆɔːｌ／ｖ．落下；发生；跌倒
（７４）
∗ｈｉｌｌ／ｈＩｌ／ｎ．山丘；小山
（７４）
∗ｇｒａｓｓ／ｇｒːｓ／；／ｇｒæｓ／ｎ．草；草地
（７４）
∗ｅｌｅｐｈａｎｔ／ˈｅｌＩｆəｎｔ／ｎ．象
（７４）
∗ａｉｒ／ｅə（ｒ）／；／ｅｒ／ｎ．空气；空中
（７４）
∗ｔｏｐ／ｔɒｐ／；／ｔːｐ／ｎ．顶部 ａｄｊ．最高的（７４）
∗ｐｌａｃｅ／ｐｌｅＩｓ／ｎ．地方；场所 ｖ．放置
（７５）
ｃｌｉｍａｔｅ／ˈｋｌａＩｍəｔ／ｎ．气候
（７６）
∗ｈｏｕｓｅ／ｈａʊｓ／ｎ．房子
（７６）
∗ｗｉｎｄｏｗ／ˈｗＩｎｄəʊ／ｎ．窗户
（７６）
∗ｇｅｔ／ｅｔ／ｖ．得到；收到；到达
（７６）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｂａｔ／ｂæｔ／ｎ．蝙蝠；球拍
（７８）
∗ｆｌｙ／ｆｌａＩ／ｖ．飞；飞行；飞越；飞逝
（７８）
ａｃｔｉｖｅ／ˈæｋｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．活跃的；积极的
（７８）
∗ｎｉｇｈｔ／ｎａＩｔ／ｎ．夜；夜晚
（７８）
∗ｐａｎｄａ／ˈｐæｎｄə ／ｎ．大熊猫；小熊猫
（７８）
∗ｔａｉｌ／ｔｅＩｌ／ｎ．尾；尾巴
（７８）
ｂａｍｂｏｏ／ˌｂæｍˈｂｕː／ｎ．竹；竹子
（７８）
∗ｂｒｏｗｎ／ｂｒａʊｎ／ａｄｊ．棕色的；褐色的
ｎ．棕色；褐色
（７８）
∗ｂｅａｒ／ｂｅə（ｒ）／；／ｂｅｒ／ｎ．熊 ｖ．承受；忍受（７８）
Words in Each Unit
136
ｆｏｒｅｓｔ／ˈｆɒｒＩｓｔ／；／ˈｆɔːｒＩｓｔ／ｎ．森林；林区（７８）
ｎｏｒｔｈ／ｎɔː／；／ｎɔːｒ／ａｄｊ．北方的 ｎ．北方
（７８）
∗ｆｉｓｈ／ｆＩʃ ／ｎ．鱼；鱼肉 ｖ．钓鱼；捕鱼
（７８）
∗ｔｈｉｎｋ／Ｉｋ／ｖ．认为；思考；想
（７９）
∗ｔｈｅｓｅ／ðｉːｚ／ｄｅｔ．这些
（７９）
ｇｒｏｗ／ｇｒəʊ／ｖ．（使）生长；增加；成长
（７９）
∗Ｍａｙ／ｍｅＩ／ｎ．五月
（７９）
∗Ｊｕｎｅ／ｄʒｕːｎ／ｎ．六月
（７９）
∗ｇｒｅｅｎ／ｒｉːｎ／ａｄｊ．绿色的 ｎ．绿色
（７９）
ｐｌｅｎｔｙ／ˈｐｌｅｎｔｉ／ｐｒｏｎ．大量；充足
（８０）
ｆｅｗ／ｆｊｕː／ｄｅｔ．，ａｄｊ．有些，几个；很少
ｐｒｏｎ．一些
（８０）
ｗｏｎｄｅｒ／ˈｗʌｎｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．奇迹 ｖ．想知道（８０）
ｍａｉｎ／ｍｅɪｎ／ａｄｊ．主要的
（８０）
ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ／ˈｄＩｆｒəｎｓ／ｎ．差别；差异
（８０）
∗ｈｏｒｓｅ／ｈɔːｓ／；／ｈɔːｒｓ／ｎ．马
（８１）
∗ｄｒｉｎｋ／ｄｒＩｋ／ｖ．喝；饮 ｎ．饮料
（８１）
∗ｅａｒｔｈ／ɜː／；／ɜːｒ／ｎ．土，泥土；地球
（８２）
∗ｅｇｇ／ｅｇ／ｎ．鸡蛋；蛋，卵
（８２）
∗ｃｏｗ／ｋａʊ／ｎ．奶牛；母牛
（８２）
∗ｍａｐ／ｍæｐ／ｎ．地图
（８２）
∗ａｐｐｌｅ／ˈæｐｌ／ｎ．苹果
（８２）
ｓｋｙ／ｓｋａＩ／ｎ．天；天空
（８２）
∗ｗｉｎｄｙ／ˈｗＩｎｄｉ／ａｄｊ．多风的；风大的
（８２）
∗ｋｉｔｅ／ｋａＩｔ／ｎ．风筝
（８２）
∗ｏｒａｎｇｅ／ˈɒｒＩｎｄʒ／；／ˈɔːｒＩｎｄʒ／ａｄｊ．橙红色的；
橘黄色的 ｎ．橙子；橙红色；橘黄色
（８２）
∗ｂｅｅ／ｂｉː／ｎ．蜜蜂
（８３）
ｓｈａｒｋ／ʃːｋ／；／ʃːｒｋ／ｎ．鲨鱼
（８３）
ｃｌｉｍｂ／ｋｌａＩｍ／ｖ．攀登；爬
（８３）
∗ｍｏｎｋｅｙ／ˈｍʌｋｉ／ｎ．猴子
（８３）
ｂｕｔｔｅｒｆｌｙ／ˈｂʌｔəｆｌａＩ／；／ˈｂʌｔəｒｆｌａＩ／ｎ．蝴蝶（８３）
∗ｄｕｃｋ／ｄʌｋ／ｎ．鸭；鸭肉
（８３）
∗ｃａｌｌ／ｋɔːｌ／ｖ．大声呼叫；把……叫作；
（给……）打电话 ｎ．通话
（８３）
ｕｎｄｅｒｓｔａｎｄ／ˌʌｎｄəˈｓｔæｎｄ／；／ˌʌｎｄəｒˈｓｔæｎｄ／
ｖ．理解；了解
（８３）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｗｉｌｄ／ｗａＩｌｄ／ａｄｊ．野生的；荒凉的
（８４）
ｒｅｓｔ／ｒｅｓｔ／ｎ．休息时间；其余
（８４）
∗ｕｎｄｅｒ／ˈʌｎｄə（ｒ）／ｐｒｅｐ．在……下面
（８４）
∗ｂｒｉｎｇ／ｂｒＩ／ｖ．带来
（８４）
ｉｍｐｏｒｔａｎｃｅ／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｔｎｓ／；／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｒｔｎｓ／
ｎ．重要性；重要
（８４）
ｆｒｅｓｈ／ｆｒｅʃ／ａｄｊ．清新的；新鲜的
（８４）
ｅｖｅｒｙｄａｙ／ˈｅｖｒｉｄｅＩ／ａｄｊ．每天的；日常的（８４）
∗ｍｉｌｋ／ｍＩｌｋ／ｎ．（牛或羊等的）奶
（８４）
ｓｏｕｔｈ／ｓａʊ／ｎ．南方 ａｄｊ．南方的
（８５）
∗ｗｉｌｌ／ｗＩｌ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．（谈及将来）；会
（８５）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
∗ｗｏｒｌｄ／ｗɜːｌｄ／；／ｗɜːｒｌｄ／ｎ．世界
（８９）
∗ｈｅａｌｔｈｙ／ˈｈｅｌｉ／ａｄｊ．健康的
（８９）
∗ｆｉｒｅ／ˈｆａＩə（ｒ）／ｎ．火；火灾
（８９）
∗ｎｏｏｄｌｅ／ˈｎｕːｄｌ／ｎ．面条
（８９）
ｄｕｍｐｌｉｎｇ／ˈｄʌｍｐｌＩ／ｎ．饺子
（８９）
∗ｒｉｖｅｒ／ˈｒＩｖə（ｒ）／ｎ．河；江
（８９）
∗ｖｅｇｅｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｖｅｄʒｔəｂｌ／ｎ．蔬菜
（８９）
∗ｒｉｃｅ／ｒａＩｓ／ｎ．大米
（８９）
Words in Each Unit 137
Ｕｎｉｔ６
ＰｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇｆｏｒｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｃｅｌｅｂｒａｔｅ／ˈｓｅｌＩｂｒｅＩｔ／ｖ．庆祝；庆贺
（９１）
ｄｏｕｂｌｅ／ˈｄʌｂｌ／ａｄｊ．成双的；两倍的
（９２）
∗ｎｉｎｔｈ／ｎａＩｎ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第九
（９２）
ｆｅｓｔｉｖａｌ／ˈｆｅｓｔＩｖｌ／ｎ．节日；节
（９２）
ｔｏｍｂ／ｔｕːｍ／ｎ．坟墓
（９２）
∗ｓｗｅｅｐ／ｓｗｉːｐ／ｖ．，ｎ．打扫，清扫
（９２）
ｄｒａｇｏｎ／ˈｄｒæｇəｎ／ｎ．龙
（９２）
ｌａｎｔｅｒｎ／ˈｌæｎｔəｎ／；／ˈｌæｎｔəｒｎ／ｎ．灯笼
（９２）
ｌｕｎａｒ／ˈｌｕːｎə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．月球的；月亮的
（９２）
∗Ａｕｇｕｓｔ／ˈɔːｇəｓｔ／ｎ．八月
（９２）
ｍｏｏｎｃａｋｅ／ˈｍｕːｎｋｅＩｋ／ｎ．月饼
（９２）
∗ｍｏｏｎ／ｍｕːｎ／ｎ．月亮；月球
（９２）
∗Ｊａｎｕａｒｙ／ˈｄʒæｎｊｕəｒｉ／；／ˈｄʒæｎｊｕｅｒｉ／
ｎ．一月
（９２）
ｌｕｃｋｙ／ˈｌʌｋｉ／ａｄｊ．带来好运的；幸运的
（９２）
∗ｍｏｎｅｙ／ˈｍʌｎｉ／ｎ．钱币；钱；财产
（９２）
ａｒｏｕｎｄ／əˈｒａʊｎｄ／ａｄｖ．大约；周围，四周
ｐｒｅｐ．围绕，环绕；在那边
（９２）
∗Ａｐｒｉｌ／ˈｅＩｐｒəｌ／ｎ．四月
（９２）
∗ｌａｔｅ／ｌｅＩｔ／ａｄｊ．已故的；迟到；近深夜的（９２）
∗ｍｏｎｔｈ／ｍʌｎ／ｎ．月；一个月的时间
（９２）
∗Ｊｕｌｙ／ｄʒｕˈｌａＩ／ｎ．七月
（９２）
∗ｆｉｆｔｈ／ｆＩｆ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第五
（９２）
ｌａｂｏｕｒ／ˈｌｅＩｂə（ｒ）／（ｌａｂｏｒＡｍＥ）ｎ．工人；劳动
（９３）
∗ｈｏｌｉｄａｙ／ˈｈɒｌəｄｅＩ／；／ˈｈːｌəｄｅＩ／ｎ．假期（９３）
∗ｂｕｙ／ｂａＩ／ｖ．购买
（９４）
ｒｅｍｅｍｂｅｒ／ｒＩˈｍｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｖ．纪念；记住；
记起；记着
（９４）
∗ｔｈａｎｋ／æｋ／ｖ．谢谢，感谢（某人）
（９４）
ＥｘｐｌｏｒｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
Ｃｈｒｉｓｔｍａｓ／ˈｋｒＩｓｍəｓ／ｎ．圣诞节
（９６）
∗ｌｉｇｈｔ／ｌａＩｔ／ｎ．电灯；光线；光
ｖ．点燃 ａｄｊ．浅色的；轻便的
（９６）
∗ｐａｐｅｒ／ˈｐｅＩｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．纸
（９６）
∗ｔｈｅｎ／ðｅｎ／ａｄｖ．然后；当时；那么
（９６）
ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔ／ˈｐｒｅｚｎｔ／ｎ．礼物 ａｄｊ．当前的
（９６）
Ｃｏｎｆｕｃｉｕｓ／ｋəｎˈｆｊｕːʃəｓ／孔子
（９７）
ｔｈｉｎｋｅｒ／ˈＩｋə（ｒ）／ｎ．思想家
（９７）
∗ｗｏｒｄ／ｗɜːｄ／；／ｗɜːｒｄ／ｎ．话语；词，字（９７）
ａｎｏｔｈｅｒ／əˈｎʌðə（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．又一
（９７）
∗Ｓｅｐｔｅｍｂｅｒ／ｓｅｐˈｔｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．九月
（９７）
∗ｓｈｏｕｌｄ／ʃʊｄ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．可以；应当
（９７）
ｃｏｕｐｌｅｔ／ˈｋʌｐｌəｔ／ｎ．对联
（９８）
∗ｌａｓｔ／ｌːｓｔ／；／ｌæｓｔ／ｄｅｔ．最后的；最近的
ｖ．持续 ａｄｖ．最终
（９８）
ｃｅｌｅｂｒａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｓｅｌＩˈｂｒｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．庆祝活动；庆祝
（９８）
∗ｋｉｔｃｈｅｎ／ˈｋＩｔʃＩｎ／ｎ．厨房
（９８）
ｄｅｌｉｃｉｏｕｓ／ｄＩˈｌＩʃəｓ／ａｄｊ．美味的，可口的
（９８）
ｍｅａｌ／ｍｉːｌ／ｎ．一顿饭
（９８）
ｆｉｎａｌｌｙ／ˈｆａＩｎəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．最后；最终
（９８）
∗ｅｘｃｉｔｅｄ／ＩｋˈｓａＩｔＩｄ／ａｄｊ．激动的；兴奋的（９８）
ａｕｔｈｏｒ／ˈɔːə（ｒ）／ｎ．著者；作者；作家
（９９）
Words in Each Unit
138
∗ｔｈｉｒｔｅｅｎｔｈ／ˌɜːˈｔｉːｎ／；／ˌɜːｒˈｔｉːｎ／
ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第十三
（１００）
∗ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ／ˈｂɜːｄｅＩ／；／ˈｂɜːｒｄｅＩ／ｎ．生日
（１００）
∗ｈｕｎｄｒｅｄ／ˈｈʌｎｄｒəｄ／ｎｕｍ．一百
（１００）
∗ｓｅｃｏｎｄ／ˈｓｅｋəｎｄ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．，ｄｅｔ．第二
ｎ．秒
（１００）
∗ｔｈｉｒｄ／ɜːｄ／；／ɜːｒｄ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第三
（１００）
∗ｎｉｎｅ／ｎａＩｎ／ｎｕｍ．九
（１００）
∗ｔｗｅｌｆｔｈ／ｔｗｅｌｆ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第十二（１００）
∗ｔｗｅｎｔｉｅｔｈ／ˈｔｗｅｎｔｉə／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第二十
（１００）
∗ｆｏｒｔｙ／ˈｆɔːｔｉ／；／ˈｆɔːｒｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．四十
（１００）
∗ｆｏｒｔｉｅｔｈ／ˈｆɔːｔｉə／；／ˈｆɔːｒｔｉə／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．
第四十
（１００）
∗ｆｉｆｔｙ／ˈｆＩｆｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．五十
（１００）
∗ｎｉｎｅｔｙ／ˈｎａＩｎｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．九十
（１００）
∗ｆｏｕｒｔｈ／ｆɔː／；／ｆɔːｒ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第四
（１００）
ｔｈｅｍｓｅｌｖｅｓ／ðəｍˈｓｅｌｖｚ／ｐｒｏｎ．他们自己；
她们自己；它们自己
（１００）
ｈａｎｇ／ｈæ／ｖ．悬挂；吊
（１０１）
ＤｅｖｅｌｏｐｉｎｇｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｄａｔｅ／ｄｅＩｔ／ｎ．日期
（１０２）
∗Ｏｃｔｏｂｅｒ／ɒｋˈｔəʊｂə（ｒ）／；／ːｋˈｔəʊｂəｒ／
ｎ．十月
（１０２）
ｓｑｕａｒｅ／ｓｋｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ｓｋｗｅｒ／ｎ．广场；
正方形 ａｄｊ．正方形的
（１０２）
∗ｓｔｒｅｅｔ／ｓｔｒｉːｔ／ｎ．街道
（１０２）
ｐｒｅｐａｒｅ／ｐｒＩˈｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｐｒＩˈｐｅｒ／ｖ．使做好
准备；做（饭）
（１０３）
ｇｕｅｓｓ／ｇｅｓ／ｖ．猜测；猜到；以为
（１０３）
ｒｉｄｄｌｅ／ˈｒＩｄｌ／ｎ．谜；谜语
（１０３）
ｌａｓｔｌｙ／ˈｌːｓｔｌｉ／；／ˈｌæｓｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．最后一点；最后
（１０４）
ＷｒａｐｐｉｎｇＵｐｔｈｅＴｏｐｉｃ
ｐｏｓｔｅｒ／ˈｐəʊｓｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．海报；招贴画
（１０５）
ｔｒａｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ／ｔｒəˈｄＩʃəｎｌ／ａｄｊ．传统的
（１０５）
∗Ｆｅｂｒｕａｒｙ／ˈｆｅｂｒｕəｒｉ／；／ˈｆｅｂｒｕｅｒｉ／ｎ．二月
（１０６）
∗Ｍａｒｃｈ／ｍːｔʃ ／；／ｍːｒｔʃ ／ｎ．三月
（１０６）
ｒｅｐｕｂｌｉｃ／ｒＩˈｐʌｂｌＩｋ／ｎ．共和国
（１０６）
∗Ｓｕｎｄａｙ／ˈｓʌｎｄｅＩ；ˈｓʌｎｄｉ／ｎ．星期日
（１０６）
∗ｃａｋｅ／ｋｅＩｋ／ｎ．糕饼；蛋糕
（１０７）
ｃａｌｅｎｄａｒ／ˈｋæｌＩｎｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．日历
（１０７）
∗ｗｏｎｄｅｒｆｕｌ／ˈｗʌｎｄəｆｌ／；／ˈｗʌｎｄəｒｆｌ／
ａｄｊ．精彩的；绝妙的
（１０７）
∗Ｄｅｃｅｍｂｅｒ／ｄＩˈｓｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．十二月（１０７）
ｍｉｄｎｉｇｈｔ／ˈｍＩｄｎａＩｔ／ｎ．午夜
（１０７）
ｂｅｌｌ／ｂｅｌ／ｎ．钟（声）；铃（声）
（１０７）
ｒｉｎｇ／ｒＩ／ｖ．（使）发出钟声 ｎ．钟声；指环
（１０７）
∗ｓａｙ／ｓｅＩ／ｖ．说；指示
（１０７）
ｌｕｃｋ／ｌʌｋ／ｎ．运气；好运
（１０７）
∗ｉｄｅａ／ａＩˈｄＩə ／；／ａＩˈｄｉːə ／ｎ．想法；主意（１０７）
说明：本词汇表音标根据《牛津高阶英汉双解词典（第１０版）》标注。
Vocabulary 139
Ｖｏｃａｂｕｌａｒｙ
注：星号词为小学阶段已学过的二级词，黑体词为《英语课程标准（２０２２
年版）》要求初中阶段应学习和掌握的基本词，白体词为课文中只要求理解的拓
展词。
Ａ
∗ａ／ə；ｅＩ／（ａｎ／əｎ；æｎ／）ａｒｔ．一（人、
事、物）；（表示为某一群体或职业
中的一员）；任何一，每一
（１０）
∗ａｂｏｕｔ／əˈｂａʊｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．关于 ａｄｖ．大约
（２５）
ａｃｔｉｖｅ／ˈæｋｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．活跃的；积极的
（７８）
ａｃｔｉｖｉｔｙ／æｋˈｔＩｖəｔｉ／ｎ．活动
（３３）
∗ａｆｔｅｒ／ˈːｆｔə（ｒ）／；／ˈæｆｔəｒ／
ｐｒｅｐ．，ｃｏｎｊ．在……后
（２６）
∗ａｆｔｅｒｎｏｏｎ／ˌːｆｔəˈｎｕːｎ／；／ˌæｆｔəｒˈｎｕːｎ／
ｎ．下午
（２４）
∗ａｇｅ／ｅɪｄʒ ／ｎ．年龄；时代
（１１）
∗ａｉｒ／ｅə（ｒ）／；／ｅｒ／ｎ．空气；空中
（７４）
∗ａｌｌ／ɔːｌ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．所有，全部
（７）
∗ａｌｓｏ／ˈɔːｌｓəʊ／ａｄｖ．也；而且
（１３）
∗ａｌｗａｙｓ／ˈɔːｌｗｅＩｚ／ａｄｖ．总是，一直
（２０）
ａ．ｍ．／ˌｅＩˈｅｍ／ａｂｂｒ．上午，午前
（４４）
∗Ａｍｅｒｉｃａｎ／əˈｍｅｒＩｋəｎ／ａｄｊ．美国的
ｎ．美国人
（４６）
∗ａｎｄ／əｎｄ；æｎｄ／ｃｏｎｊ．和；然后
（４）
∗ａｎｉｍａｌ／ˈæｎＩｍｌ／ｎ．动物
（７４）
ａｎｏｔｈｅｒ／əˈｎʌðə（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．又一
（９７）
∗ａｎｓｗｅｒ／ˈːｎｓə（ｒ）／；／ˈæｎｓəｒ／ｖ．答复；回答
ｎ．答复，回答；答案
（４５）
∗ａｎｙ／ˈｅｎｉ／ｄｅｔ．任何的，任一的；任一
ｐｒｏｎ．任一；任何数量
（４７）
∗ａｐｐｌｅ／ˈæｐｌ／ｎ．苹果
（８２）
∗Ａｐｒｉｌ／ˈｅＩｐｒəｌ／ｎ．四月
（９２）
ａｒｏｕｎｄ／əˈｒａʊｎｄ／ａｄｖ．大约；周围，四周
ｐｒｅｐ．围绕，环绕；在那边
（９２）
∗ａｒｔ／ːｔ／；／ːｒｔ／ｎ．美术，艺术
（３８）
ａｓ／əｚ；æｚ／ｐｒｅｐ．像；作为 ａｄｖ．如同
（１３）
∗ａｓｋ／ːｓｋ／；／æｓｋ／ｖ．问，询问；请求
（５３）
∗ａｔ／æｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．在（某处）；在（某时间）；在（表
示学习或工作地点）；在……方面；向
（８）
∗Ａｕｇｕｓｔ／ˈɔːｇəｓｔ／ｎ．八月
（９２）
∗ａｕｎｔ／ːｎｔ／；／æｎｔ／ｎ．姑母；姨母；伯母；
婶母；舅母
（２０）
ａｕｔｈｏｒ／ˈɔːə（ｒ）／ｎ．著者；作者；作家
（９９）
∗ａｕｔｕｍｎ／ˈɔːｔəｍ／ｎ．秋天；秋季
（５６）
Vocabulary
140
Ｂ
ｂａｄｍｉｎｔｏｎ／ˈｂæｄｍＩｎｔəｎ／ｎ．羽毛球运动（５８）
∗ｂａｌｌ／ｂɔːｌ／ｎ．球
（４８）
ｂａｍｂｏｏ／ˌｂæｍˈｂｕː／ｎ．竹；竹子
（７８）
ｂａｓｅｂａｌｌ／ˈｂｅＩｓｂɔːｌ／ｎ．棒球运动；棒球
（５８）
∗ｂａｓｋｅｔｂａｌｌ／ˈｂːｓｋＩｔｂɔːｌ／；／ˈｂæｓｋＩｔｂɔːｌ／
ｎ．篮球运动；篮球
（２４）
ｂａｔ／ｂæｔ／ｎ．蝙蝠；球拍
（７８）
∗ｂｅ／ｂｉ；ｂｉː／（现在式ａｍ，ａｒｅ，ｉｓ；
过去式ｗａｓ，ｗｅｒｅ；过去分词ｂｅｅｎ；
现在分词ｂｅｉｎｇ）ｖ．成为；是；在；等于（１）
∗ｂｅａｒ／ｂｅə（ｒ）／；／ｂｅｒ／ｎ．熊 ｖ．承受；忍受（７８）
∗ｂｅａｕｔｉｆｕｌ／ˈｂｊｕːｔＩｆｌ／ａｄｊ．美丽的；美好的（１３）
∗ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ／ｂＩˈｋəｚ／；／ｂＩˈｋɔːｚ／ｃｏｎｊ．因为（５２）
∗ｂｅｅ／ｂｉː／ｎ．蜜蜂
（８３）
∗ｂｅｆｏｒｅ／ｂＩˈｆɔː（ｒ）／ｐｒｅｐ．，ｃｏｎｊ．在……以前（６１）
∗ｂｅｇｉｎ／ｂＩˈＩｎ／ｖ．开始
（３８）
ｂｅｌｌ／ｂｅｌ／ｎ．钟（声）；铃（声）
（１０７）
∗ｂｅｓｔ／ｂｅｓｔ／ａｄｊ．最好的 ａｄｖ．最
ｎ．最好的事物（或人）；最高标准
（８）
∗ｂｉｇ／ｂＩ／ａｄｊ．大的；年纪较长的；大受
欢迎的
（１０）
∗ｂｉｋｅ／ｂａＩｋ／（ｂｉｃｙｃｌｅ／ˈｂａＩｓＩｋｌ／）ｎ．自行车
（２８）
ｂｉｏｌｏｇｙ／ｂａＩˈɒｌəｄʒｉ／；／ｂａＩˈːｌəｄʒｉ／ｎ．生物学
（３８）
∗ｂｉｒｄ／ｂɜːｄ／；／ｂɜːｒｄ／ｎ．鸟；禽
（６５）
∗ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ／ˈｂɜːｄｅＩ／；／ˈｂɜːｒｄｅＩ／ｎ．生日
（１００）
∗ｂｌａｃｋ／ｂｌæｋ／ａｄｊ．黑色的 ｎ．黑色
（１０）
∗ｂｌａｃｋｂｏａｒｄ／ˈｂｌæｋｂɔːｄ／；／ˈｂｌæｋｂɔːｒｄ／
ｎ．黑板
（４７）
∗ｂｌｕｅ／ｂｌｕː／ａｄｊ．蓝色的 ｎ．蓝色
（２０）
∗ｂｏａｔ／ｂəʊｔ／ｎ．（泛指）船；舟，小船
（４０）
∗ｂｏｏｋ／ｂʊｋ／ｎ．书 ｖ．预约，预订
（１３）
ｂｏｔｔｌｅ／ˈｂɒｔｌ／；／ˈｂːｔｌ／ｎ．瓶子
（４７）
∗ｂｏｘ／ｂɒｋｓ／；／ｂːｋｓ／ｎ．盒，箱；方框
（４６）
∗ｂｏｙ／ｂɔＩ／ｎ．男孩
（１１）
ｂｒｉｇｈｔ／ｂｒａＩｔ／ａｄｊ．明亮的；光线充足的
（４２）
∗ｂｒｉｎｇ／ｂｒＩ／ｖ．带来
（８４）
∗ｂｒｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈｂｒʌðə（ｒ）／ｎ．哥哥；弟弟
（１０）
∗ｂｒｏｗｎ／ｂｒａʊｎ／ａｄｊ．棕色的；褐色的
ｎ．棕色，褐色
（７８）
ｂｕｉｌｄｉｎｇ／ˈｂＩｌｄＩ／ｎ．建筑物；楼房
（４２）
∗ｂｕｓ／ｂʌｓ／ｎ．公共汽车
（２０）
∗ｂｕｓｙ／ˈｂＩｚｉ／ａｄｊ．忙碌的；全身心忙于某事
（２４）
∗ｂｕｔ／ｂəｔ；ｂʌｔ／ｃｏｎｊ．相反；然而
（１６）
ｂｕｔｔｅｒｆｌｙ／ˈｂʌｔəｆｌａＩ／；／ˈｂʌｔəｒｆｌａＩ／ｎ．蝴蝶（８３）
∗ｂｕｙ／ｂａＩ／ｖ．购买
（９４）
∗ｂｙ／ｂａＩ／ｐｒｅｐ．（表示方式）；（表示施事者）；
在……旁边；在……之前
（４０）
Ｃ
∗ｃａｋｅ／ｋｅＩｋ／ｎ．糕饼；蛋糕
（１０７）
ｃａｌｅｎｄａｒ／ˈｋæｌＩｎｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．日历
（１０７）
∗ｃａｌｌ／ｋɔːｌ／ｖ．大声呼叫；把……叫作；
（给……）打电话 ｎ．通话
（８３）
∗ｃａｎ／ｋəｎ；ｋæｎ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．可以；能，会
（７）
∗ｃａｐ／ｋæｐ／ｎ．便帽，制服帽
（７０）
∗ｃａｒ／ｋː（ｒ）／ｎ．小汽车；轿车
（４０）
∗ｃａｒｄ／ｋːｄ／；／ｋːｒｄ／ｎ．卡片纸；贺卡（１５）
Vocabulary 141
∗ｃａｔ／ｋæｔ／ｎ．猫
（１０）
ｃｅｌｅｂｒａｔｅ／ˈｓｅｌＩｂｒｅＩｔ／ｖ．庆祝；庆贺
（９１）
ｃｅｌｅｂｒａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｓｅｌＩˈｂｒｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．庆祝活动；庆祝
（９８）
∗ｃｈａｉｒ／ｔʃｅə（ｒ）／；／ｔʃｅｒ／ｎ．椅子
（４７）
∗ｃｈｉｌｄ／ｔʃａＩｌｄ／（ｐｌ．ｃｈｉｌｄｒｅｎ／ˈｔʃɪｌｄｒəｎ／）
ｎ．儿子，女儿；儿童，小孩
（２０）
∗Ｃｈｉｎｅｓｅ／ˌｔʃａＩˈｎｉːｚ／ｎ．汉语；中国人
ａｄｊ．中国的
（３８）
∗ｃｈｏｒｅ／ｔʃɔː（ｒ）／ｎ．日常事务；例行工作（２４）
Ｃｈｒｉｓｔｍａｓ／ˈｋｒＩｓｍəｓ／ｎ．圣诞节
（９６）
∗ｃｉｔｙ／ˈｓɪｔｉ／ｎ．都市；城市
（５１）
∗ｃｌａｓｓ／ｋｌːｓ／；／ｋｌæｓ／ｎ．班级；课；阶层（４）
ｃｌａｓｓｍａｔｅ／ˈｋｌːｓｍｅＩｔ／；／ˈｋｌæｓｍｅＩｔ／
ｎ．同班同学
（４）
∗ｃｌａｓｓｒｏｏｍ／ˈｋｌːｓｒｕːｍ／；／ˈｋｌæｓｒｕːｍ／
ｎ．教室；课堂
（４６）
∗ｃｌｅａｎ／ｋｌｉːｎ／ｖ．打扫 ａｄｊ．干净的；清新的
（２６）
ｃｌｉｍａｔｅ／ˈｋｌａＩｍəｔ／ｎ．气候
（７６）
ｃｌｉｍｂ／ｋｌａＩｍ／ｖ．攀登；爬
（８３）
∗ｃｌｏｔｈｅｓ／ｋｌəʊðｚ；ｋｌəʊｚ／ｎ．衣服；服装（６１）
∗ｃｌｏｕｄｙ／ˈｋｌａʊｄｉ／ａｄｊ．阴天的；多云的
（６０）
ｃｌｕｂ／ｋｌʌｂ／ｎ．俱乐部；社团
（４３）
∗ｃｏｌｄ／ｋəʊｌｄ／ａｄｊ．寒冷的 ｎ．感冒
（５６）
∗ｃｏｌｏｕｒ／ˈｋʌｌə（ｒ）／（ｃｏｌｏｒＡｍＥ）ｎ．颜色
ｖ．为……着色
（４８）
ｃｏｌｏｕｒｆｕｌ／ˈｋʌｌəｆｌ／；／ˈｋʌｌəｒｆｌ／（ｃｏｌｏｒｆｕｌＡｍＥ）
ａｄｊ．丰富多彩的；五彩缤纷的
（３７）
∗ｃｏｍｅ／ｋʌｍ／ｖ．来；来到
（４０）
∗ｃｏｍｐｕｔｅｒ／ｋəｍˈｐｊｕːｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．电脑
（３８）
Ｃｏｎｆｕｃｉｕｓ／ｋəｎˈｆｊｕːʃəｓ／孔子
（９７）
∗ｃｏｏｋ／ｋʊｋ／ｖ．烹饪，烹调 ｎ．厨师
（６）
∗ｃｏｏｌ／ｋｕːｌ／ａｄｊ．凉的，凉爽的；酷的
（５６）
ｃｏｕｎｔｒｙ／ˈｋʌｎｔｒｉ／ｎ．国家
（４６）
ｃｏｕｐｌｅｔ／ˈｋʌｐｌəｔ／ｎ．对联
（９８）
∗ｃｏｕｓｉｎ／ˈｋʌｚｎ／ｎ．同辈表亲（或堂亲）（２０）
∗ｃｏｗ／ｋａʊ／ｎ．奶牛；母牛
（８２）
∗ｃｕｔｅ／ｋｊｕːｔ／ａｄｊ．可爱的；漂亮迷人的
（８）
Ｄ
∗ｄａｎｃｅ／ｄːｎｓ／；／ｄæｎｓ／ｖ．跳舞
（３）
ｄａｔｅ／ｄｅＩｔ／ｎ．日期
（１０２）
∗ｄａｙ／ｄｅＩ／ｎ．一天；白天
（３４）
∗Ｄｅｃｅｍｂｅｒ／ｄＩˈｓｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．十二月（１０７）
ｄｅｌｉｃｉｏｕｓ／ｄＩˈｌＩʃəｓ／ａｄｊ．美味的，可口的
（９８）
ｄｅｓｅｒｔ／ˈｄｅｚəｔ／；／ˈｄｅｚəｒｔ／ｎ．沙漠
（７４）
∗ｄｅｓｋ／ｄｅｓｋ／ｎ．书桌
（４７）
ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ／ˈｄＩｆｒəｎｓ／ｎ．差别；差异
（８０）
ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔ／ˈｄＩｆｒəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．不同的；各种的（１７）
∗ｄｉｎｎｅｒ／ˈｄＩｎə（ｒ）／ｎ．正餐，主餐
（２６）
ｄｉｓｈ／ｄＩʃ ／ｎ．菜肴；餐具
（４６）
∗ｄｏ／ｄｕː／ａｕｘ．（用于实义动词前构成
否定句和疑问句） ｖ．做；从事（职业）；
进行（活动）
（２）
∗ｄｏｃｔｏｒ／ˈｄɒｋｔə（ｒ）／；／ˈｄːｋｔəｒ／ｎ．医生（２０）
∗ｄｏｇ／ｄɒ／；／ｄɔː／ｎ．狗
（１０）
ｄｏｕｂｌｅ／ˈｄʌｂｌ／ａｄｊ．成双的；两倍的
（９２）
∗ｄｏｗｎ／ｄａʊｎ／ａｄｖ．（写）在纸上；向下
ｐｒｅｐ．向下；沿着
（７１）
ｄｒａｇｏｎ／ˈｄｒæｇəｎ／ｎ．龙
（９２）
Vocabulary
142
∗ｄｒａｗ／ｄｒɔː／ｖ．画，描绘
（６）
∗ｄｒｅｓｓ／ｄｒｅｓ／ｎ．连衣裙
（２０）
∗ｄｒｉｎｋ／ｄｒＩｋ／ｖ．喝；饮 ｎ．饮料
（８１）
∗ｄｒｉｖｅｒ／ˈｄｒａＩｖə（ｒ）／ｎ．司机
（２０）
ｄｒｙ／ｄｒａＩ／ａｄｊ．干燥的；干旱的
（５７）
∗ｄｕｃｋ／ｄʌｋ／ｎ．鸭；鸭肉
（８３）
ｄｕｍｐｌｉｎｇ／ˈｄʌｍｐｌＩ／ｎ．饺子
（８９）
ｄｕｒｉｎｇ／ˈｄｊʊəｒＩ／；／ˈｄʊｒＩ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……期间
（４６）
Ｅ
ｅａｃｈ／ｉːｔʃ ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．各个，每个
（７）
∗ｅａｒ／Ｉə（ｒ）／；／Ｉｒ／ｎ．耳；耳朵
（１０）
∗ｅａｒｔｈ／ɜː／；／ɜːｒ／ｎ．土，泥土；地球
（８２）
∗ｅａｔ／ｉːｔ／ｖ．吃饭；吃
（２４）
∗ｅｇｇ／ｅｇ／ｎ．鸡蛋；蛋，卵
（８２）
∗ｅｉｇｈｔ／ｅＩｔ／ｎｕｍ．八
（２２）
∗ｅｉｇｈｔｅｅｎ／ˌｅＩˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十八
（４）
∗ｅｌｅｐｈａｎｔ／ˈｅｌＩｆəｎｔ／ｎ．象
（７４）
∗ｅｌｅｖｅｎ／Ｉˈｌｅｖｎ／ｎｕｍ．十一
（４）
ｅｎｄ／ｅｎｄ／ｖ．结束；终止 ｎ．结尾；末端
（４９）
∗Ｅｎｇｌｉｓｈ／ˈＩｌＩʃ／ｎ．英语学科；英语；英格兰人
ａｄｊ．英格兰的；英格兰人的；英语的（３８）
ｅｎｊｏｙ／ＩｎˈｄʒɔＩ／ｖ．享受……的乐趣；喜爱；
欣赏
（２）
ｅｖｅｎ／ｉːｖｎ／ａｄｖ．甚至，连；更加
（７１）
∗ｅｖｅｒｙ／ˈｅｖｒｉ／ｄｅｔ．每一个；每逢
（３４）
ｅｖｅｒｙｄａｙ／ˈｅｖｒｉｄｅＩ／ａｄｊ．每天的；日常的（８４）
ｅｖｅｒｙｏｎｅ／ˈｅｖｒｉｗʌｎ／（ｅｖｅｒｙｂｏｄｙ／ˈｅｖｒｉｂɒｄｉ／；
／ˈｅｖｒｉｂːｄｉ／）ｐｒｏｎ．每人
（１３）
∗ｅｘｃｉｔｅｄ／ＩｋˈｓａＩｔＩｄ／ａｄｊ．激动的；兴奋的（９８）
∗ｅｘｅｒｃｉｓｅ／ˈｅｋｓəｓａＩｚ／；／ˈｅｋｓəｒｓａＩｚ／
ｎ．锻炼；练习 ｖ．锻炼
（６１）
Ｆ
ｆａｃｔｏｒｙ／ˈｆæｋｔｒｉ；ˈｆæｋｔəｒｉ／ｎ．工厂
（２２）
ｆａｌｌ／ｆɔːｌ／ｖ．落下；发生；跌倒
（７４）
∗ｆａｍｉｌｙ／ˈｆæｍəｌｉ／ｎ．家庭；亲属
（１９）
∗ｆａｒ／ｆː（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．远
（４０）
∗ｆａｓｔ／ｆːｓｔ／；／ｆæｓｔ／ａｄｖ．快；迅速
ａｄｊ．快的；迅速的
（６４）
∗ｆａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｆːðə（ｒ）／ｎ．父亲；先驱
（２０）
∗ｆａｖｏｕｒｉｔｅ／ˈｆｅＩｖəｒＩｔ／（ｆａｖｏｒｉｔｅＡｍＥ）
ａｄｊ．特别受喜爱的 ｎ．特别喜爱的人
（或事物）
（３９）
∗Ｆｅｂｒｕａｒｙ／ˈｆｅｂｒｕəｒｉ／；／ˈｆｅｂｒｕｅｒｉ／ｎ．二月
（１０６）
ｆｅｅｄ／ｆｉːｄ／ｖ．喂养；进食
（６５）
∗ｆｅｅｌ／ｆｉːｌ／ｖ．觉得，感到；摸起来
（６２）
ｆｅｓｔｉｖａｌ／ˈｆｅｓｔＩｖｌ／ｎ．节日；节
（９２）
ｆｅｗ／ｆｊｕː／ｄｅｔ．，ａｄｊ．有些，几个；很少
ｐｒｏｎ．一些
（８０）
∗ｆｉｆｔｅｅｎ／ˌｆＩｆˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十五
（４）
∗ｆｉｆｔｈ／ｆＩｆ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第五
（９２）
∗ｆｉｆｔｙ／ˈｆＩｆｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．五十
（１００）
∗ｆｉｌｍ／ｆｉｌｍ／ｎ．电影；影片
（３１）
ｆｉｎａｌｌｙ／ˈｆａＩｎəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．最后；最终
（９８）
∗ｆｉｎｄ／ｆａＩｎｄ／ｖ．找到；发现；认为
（４８）
∗ｆｉｎｅ／ｆａＩｎ／ａｄｊ．身体好的，健康的；很好
ｖ．对……处以罚款 ｎ．罚款
（２）
∗ｆｉｒｅ／ˈｆａＩə（ｒ）／ｎ．火；火灾
（８９）
∗ｆｉｒｓｔ／ｆɜːｓｔ／；／ｆɜːｒｓｔ／ｄｅｔ．，ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．
Vocabulary 143
第一；首要的 ａｄｖ．首先；第一次
（４４）
∗ｆｉｓｈ／ｆＩʃ ／ｎ．鱼；鱼肉 ｖ．钓鱼；捕鱼
（７８）
∗ｆｉｖｅ／ｆａＩｖ／ｎｕｍ．五
（４２）
ｆｌａｇ／ｆｌæ／ｎ．旗；旗帜
（４４）
∗ｆｌｏｏｒ／ｆｌɔː（ｒ）／ｎ．楼层；地板
（４２）
∗ｆｌｏｗｅｒ／ˈｆｌａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．花，花朵；花卉
（４２）
∗ｆｌｙ／ｆｌａＩ／ｖ．飞；飞行；飞越；飞逝
（７８）
∗ｆｏｏｄ／ｆｕːｄ／ｎ．食物
（２６）
∗ｆｏｏｔ／ｆʊｔ／（ｐｌ．ｆｅｅｔ／ｆｉːｔ／）ｎ．脚，足；底部（４０）
∗ｆｏｏｔｂａｌｌ／ˈｆʊｔｂɔːｌ／ｎ．足球运动；足球
（２）
∗ｆｏｒ／ｆə（ｒ）；ｆɔː（ｒ）／ｐｒｅｐ．为得到；给；
为了；（表示目的或功能）；因为
（２６）
ｆｏｒｅｓｔ／ˈｆɒｒＩｓｔ／；／ˈｆɔːｒＩｓｔ／ｎ．森林；林区（７８）
∗ｆｏｒｔｉｅｔｈ／ˈｆɔːｔｉə／；／ˈｆɔːｒｔｉə／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．
第四十
（１００）
∗ｆｏｒｔｙ／ˈｆɔːｔｉ／；／ˈｆɔːｒｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．四十
（１００）
∗ｆｏｕｒ／ｆɔː（ｒ）／ｎｕｍ．四
（１７）
∗ｆｏｕｒｔｅｅｎ／ˌｆɔːˈｔｉːｎ／；／ˌｆɔːｒˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十四（４）
∗ｆｏｕｒｔｈ／ｆɔː／；／ｆɔːｒ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第四
（１００）
ｆｒｅｓｈ／ｆｒｅʃ ／ａｄｊ．清新的；新鲜的
（８４）
∗Ｆｒｉｄａｙ／ˈｆｒａＩｄｅＩ；ˈｆｒａＩｄｉ／ｎ．星期五
（４３）
∗ｆｒｉｅｎｄ／ｆｒｅｎｄ／ｎ．朋友
（１）
ｆｒｉｅｎｄｌｙ／ˈｆｒｅｎｄｌｉ／ａｄｊ．友好的；亲切的
（６）
∗ｆｒｏｍ／ｆｒəｍ／；／ｆｒʌｍ／ｐｒｅｐ．来自；离；
始于；从
（４）
ｆｕｎ／ｆʌｎ／ａｄｊ．有趣的 ｎ．乐趣
（４４）
Ｇ
∗ｇａｍｅ／ｅＩｍ／ｎ．游戏；运动项目；比赛（４３）
∗ｇａｒｄｅｎ／ˈːｄｎ／；／ˈːｒｄｎ／ｎ．花园
（４２）
ｇｅｏｇｒａｐｈｙ／ｄʒｉˈɒｇｒəｆｉ／；／ｄʒｉˈːｇｒəｆｉ／
ｎ．地理（学）
（３８）
∗ｇｅｔ／ｅｔ／ｖ．得到；收到；到达
（７６）
∗ｇｉｒｌ／ɜːｌ／；／ɜːｒｌ／ｎ．女孩
（１２）
∗ｇｉｖｅ／Ｉｖ／ｖ．提供；送给；给
（６２）
∗ｇｌａｓｓ／ｇｌːｓ／；／ｇｌæｓ／ｎ．玻璃杯；眼镜；玻璃
（４６）
∗ｇｏ／əʊ／ｖ．去；出发；去从事
（２４）
∗ｇｏｏｄ／ʊｄ／ａｄｊ．令人愉快的；好的；擅长的；
对……有好处；完全的
（２）
ｇｒａｄｅ／ｒｅＩｄ／ｎ．年级；成绩等级
（４）
∗ｇｒａｎｄｆａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｒæｎｆːðə（ｒ）／（ｇｒａｎｄｐａ
／ˈｇｒæｎｐː／）ｎ．（外）祖父
（２０）
∗ｇｒａｎｄｍｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈｒæｎｍʌðə（ｒ）／（ｇｒａｎｄｍａ
／ˈｇｒæｎｍː／）ｎ．（外）祖母
（２０）
ｇｒａｎｄｐａｒｅｎｔ／ˈｇｒæｎｐｅəｒəｎｔ／；／ˈｇｒæｎｐｅｒəｎｔ／
ｎ．祖父；祖母；外祖父；外祖母
（２４）
∗ｇｒａｐｅ／ｇｒｅＩｐ／ｎ．葡萄
（６４）
∗ｇｒａｓｓ／ｇｒːｓ／；／ｇｒæｓ／ｎ．草；草地
（７４）
ｇｒａｓｓｌａｎｄ／ˈｇｒːｓｌæｎｄ／；／ˈｇｒæｓｌæｎｄ／ｎ．草原
（７４）
∗ｇｒｅａｔ／ｒｅＩｔ／ａｄｊ．（强调某种情况）；
好极的；优秀的
（１３）
∗ｇｒｅｅｎ／ｒｉːｎ／ａｄｊ．绿色的 ｎ．绿色
（７９）
ｇｒｏｗ／ｇｒəʊ／ｖ．（使）生长；增加；成长
（７９）
ｇｕｅｓｓ／ｇｅｓ／ｖ．猜测；猜到；以为
（１０３）
ｇｕｉｔａｒ／ｇＩˈｔː（ｒ）／ｎ．吉他
（８）
Ｈ
∗ｈａｌｆ／ｈːｆ／；／ｈæｆ／ｎ．一半
（３８）
ｈａｌｌ／ｈɔːｌ／ｎ．礼堂，大厅；走廊；门厅
（４３）
Vocabulary
144
∗ｈａｎｄ／ｈæｎｄ／ｎ．手；帮助
（４５）
ｈａｎｇ／ｈæ／ｖ．悬挂；吊
（１０１）
∗ｈａｐｐｙ／ˈｈæｐｉ／ａｄｊ．高兴的；幸福的；
（表示祝愿）；乐意（做某事）
（８）
∗ｈａｒｄ／ｈːｄ／；／ｈːｒｄ／ａｄｖ．努力地
ａｄｊ．难做的；艰难的；努力的
（３４）
∗ｈａｖｅ／ｈæｖ／（ｈａｓ／ｈæｚ／，是ｈａｖｅ的第三
人称单数形式）ｖ．有；吃；经历
（９）
∗ｈｅ／ｈｉ；ｈｉː／ｐｒｏｎ．他
（７）
ｈｅａｌｔｈ／ｈｅｌ／ｎ．健康
（６１）
∗ｈｅａｌｔｈｙ／ˈｈｅｌｉ／ａｄｊ．健康的
（８９）
∗ｈｅｌｌｏ／ｈəˈｌəʊ／ｅｘｃｌ．你好，喂
（２）
∗ｈｅｌｐ／ｈｅｌｐ／ｖ．，ｎ．帮助
（７）
∗ｈｅｌｐｆｕｌ／ˈｈｅｌｐｆｌ／ａｄｊ．愿意帮忙的；有帮助的
（６）
∗ｈｅｒ／ｈə（ｒ）；ｈɜː（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．她的 ｐｒｏｎ．她（１３）
∗ｈｅｒｅ／ｈＩə（ｒ）／；／ｈＩｒ／ａｄｖ．（给某人东西或
指出某物时说）；在这里
（８）
∗ｈｉ／ｈａＩ／ｅｘｃｌ．你好，嗨
（４）
ｈｉｇｈ／ｈａＩ／ａｄｊ．高的 ａｄｖ．高；在高处
（３５）
ｈｉｋｅ／ｈａＩｋ／ｖ．远足；徒步旅行
（２）
∗ｈｉｌｌ／ｈＩｌ／ｎ．山丘；小山
（７４）
∗ｈｉｍ／ｈＩｍ／ｐｒｏｎ．他
（２５）
∗ｈｉｓ／ｈɪｚ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．他的
（２５）
ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ／ˈｈＩｓｔｒｉ／ｎ．历史课；地方志；历史（３８）
∗ｈｏｌｉｄａｙ／ˈｈɒｌəｄｅＩ／；／ˈｈːｌəｄｅＩ／ｎ．假期（９３）
∗ｈｏｍｅ／ｈəʊｍ／ｎ．家；栖息地 ａｄｖ．在家（３１）
∗ｈｏｍｅｔｏｗｎ／ˈｈəʊｍｔａʊｎ／ｎ．家乡；故乡（６７）
ｈｏｍｅｗｏｒｋ／ˈｈəʊｍｗɜːｋ／；／ˈｈəʊｍｗɜːｒｋ／
ｎ．家庭作业
（５８）
ｈｏｐｅ／ｈəʊｐ／ｖ．，ｎ．希望
（５８）
∗ｈｏｒｓｅ／ｈɔːｓ／；／ｈɔːｒｓ／ｎ．马
（８１）
∗ｈｏｓｐｉｔａｌ／ˈｈɒｓｐＩｔｌ／；／ˈｈːｓｐＩｔｌ／ｎ．医院（２２）
∗ｈｏｔ／ｈɒｔ／；／ｈːｔ／ａｄｊ．温度高的；热的（５６）
∗ｈｏｕｒ／ˈａʊə（ｒ）／ｎ．小时
（６９）
∗ｈｏｕｓｅ／ｈａʊｓ／ｎ．房子
（７６）
∗ｈｏｗ／ｈａʊ／ａｄｖ．怎样；多少，多么
（２）
∗ｈｕｎｄｒｅｄ／ˈｈʌｎｄｒəｄ／ｎｕｍ．一百
（１００）
Ｉ
∗Ｉ／ａＩ／ｐｒｏｎ．我
（２）
∗ｉｄｅａ／ａＩˈｄＩə ／；／ａＩˈｄｉːə ／ｎ．想法；主意（１０７）
ｉｍｐｏｒｔａｎｃｅ／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｔｎｓ／；／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｒｔｎｓ／
ｎ．重要性；重要
（８４）
ｉｍｐｏｒｔａｎｔ／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｔｎｔ／；／Ｉｍˈｐɔːｒｔｎｔ／
ａｄｊ．重要的
（６１）
∗ｉｎ／Ｉｎ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……中；用；穿着
（４）
ｉｎｄｏｏｒｓ／ˌＩｎˈｄɔːｚ／；／ˌＩｎˈｄɔːｒｚ／ａｄｖ．在室内
（６０）
∗ｉｎｔｅｒｅｓｔｉｎｇ／ˈＩｎｔｒəｓｔＩ；ˈＩｎｔｒｅｓｔＩ／
ａｄｊ．有趣的
（４９）
∗ｉｔ／Ｉｔ／ｐｒｏｎ．它
（１０）
∗ｉｔｓ／Ｉｔｓ／ｄｅｔ．（指事物、动物或婴儿）
它的，他的，她的
（２８）
Ｊ
∗Ｊａｎｕａｒｙ／ˈｄʒæｎｊｕəｒｉ／；／ˈｄʒæｎｊｕｅｒｉ／
ｎ．一月
（９２）
∗ｊｏｂ／ｄʒɒｂ／；／ｄʒːｂ／ｎ．工作
（２８）
ｊｏｉｎ／ｄʒɔＩｎ／ｖ．参加；加入
（４９）
∗ｊｕｉｃｅ／ｄʒｕːｓ／ｎ．果汁；菜汁
（４７）
∗Ｊｕｌｙ／ｄʒｕˈｌａＩ／ｎ．七月
（９２）
Vocabulary 145
∗Ｊｕｎｅ／ｄʒｕːｎ／ｎ．六月
（７９）
Ｋ
∗ｋｅｅｐ／ｋｉːｐ／ｖ．继续；保持；存放；记录（６２）
∗ｋｉｎｄ／ｋａＩｎｄ／ａｄｊ．友好的 ｎ．种类
（６）
∗ｋｉｔｃｈｅｎ／ˈｋＩｔʃＩｎ／ｎ．厨房
（９８）
∗ｋｉｔｅ／ｋａＩｔ／ｎ．风筝
（８２）
ｋｎｉｆｅ／ｎａＩｆ／（ｐｌ．ｋｎｉｖｅｓ／ｎａＩｖｚ／）ｎ．刀
（４６）
∗ｋｎｏｗ／ｎəʊ／ｖ．知道；认识
（１５）
Ｌ
ｌａｂｏｕｒ／ˈｌｅＩｂə（ｒ）／（ｌａｂｏｒＡｍＥ）ｎ．工人；劳动
（９３）
∗ｌａｋｅ／ｌｅＩｋ／ｎ．湖；湖泊
（６５）
ｌａｎｔｅｒｎ／ˈｌæｎｔəｎ／；／ˈｌæｎｔəｒｎ／ｎ．灯笼
（９２）
∗ｌａｓｔ／ｌːｓｔ／；／ｌæｓｔ／ｄｅｔ．最后的；最近的
ｖ．持续 ａｄｖ．最终
（９８）
ｌａｓｔｌｙ／ˈｌːｓｔｌｉ／；／ˈｌæｓｔｌｉ／ａｄｖ．最后一点；最后
（１０４）
∗ｌａｔｅ／ｌｅＩｔ／ａｄｊ．已故的；迟到；近深夜的（９２）
∗ｌｅａｒｎ／ｌɜːｎ／；／ｌɜːｒｎ／ｖ．学习；记住
（４９）
∗ｌｅｇ／ｌｅｇ／ｎ．有……腿的；腿
（７１）
∗ｌｅｔ／ｌｅｔ／ｖ．让；允许
（１）
∗ｌｉｂｒａｒｙ／ˈｌａＩｂｒəｒｉ／；／ˈｌａＩｂｒｅｒｉ／ｎ．图书馆（４２）
ｌｉｆｅ／ｌａɪｆ／（ｐｌ．ｌｉｖｅｓ／ｌａＩｖｚ／）ｎ．生活；生命（３７）
∗ｌｉｇｈｔ／ｌａＩｔ／ｎ．电灯；光线；光
ｖ．点燃 ａｄｊ．浅色的；轻便的
（９６）
∗ｌｉｋｅ／ｌａＩｋ／ｖ．喜欢；想要 ｐｒｅｐ．像；
……怎么样；像……一样
（２）
∗ｌｉｓｔｅｎ／ˈｌＩｓｎ／ｖ．听
（１０）
∗ｌｉｔｔｌｅ／ˈｌＩｔｌ／ａｄｊ．小的；年幼的；可怜的
ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．不多的；少量的
（１０）
∗ｌｉｖｅ／ｌＩｖ／ｖ．居住；生活
（２５）
∗ｌｏｎｇ／ｌɒ／；／ｌɔː／ａｄｖ．（强调某事发生
在某整段时间）；长期地；长久地
ａｄｊ．长的；长时间的 ｖ．渴望
（６０）
∗ｌｏｏｋ／ｌʊｋ／ｖ．显得；看；好像是 ｎ．看；相貌（３４）
ｌｏｓｔ／ｌɒｓｔ／；／ｌɔːｓｔ／ａｄｊ．丢失的；迷路的
（４８）
∗ｌｏｔ／ｌɒｔ／；／ｌːｔ／ａｄｖ．（与动词连用）非常
ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．大量，许多
（３５）
∗ｌｏｖｅ／ｌʌｖ／ｖ．，ｎ．喜爱；爱
（２）
∗ｌｏｖｅｌｙ／ˈｌʌｖｌｉ／ａｄｊ．美丽的，迷人的
（１０）
ｌｕｃｋ／ｌʌｋ／ｎ．运气；好运
（１０７）
ｌｕｃｋｙ／ˈｌʌｋｉ／ａｄｊ．带来好运的；幸运的
（９２）
ｌｕｎａｒ／ˈｌｕːｎə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．月球的；月亮的
（９２）
Ｍ
ｍａｉｎ／ｍｅɪｎ／ａｄｊ．主要的
（８０）
∗ｍａｋｅ／ｍｅＩｋ／ｖ．使成为；出产，写；做；
使变得；使得
（４４）
∗ｍａｎ／ｍæｎ／（ｐｌ．ｍｅｎ／ｍｅｎ／）ｎ．成年男子；
人类
（２０）
∗ｍａｎｙ／ˈｍｅｎｉ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．许多
（１３）
∗ｍａｐ／ｍæｐ／ｎ．地图
（８２）
∗Ｍａｒｃｈ／ｍːｔʃ ／；／ｍːｒｔʃ ／ｎ．三月
（１０６）
∗ｍａｔｈｓ／ｍæｓ／（ｍａｔｈ／ｍæ／ＡｍＥ）ｎ．数学
（３４）
∗Ｍａｙ／ｍｅＩ／ｎ．五月
（７９）
∗ｍｅ／ｍｉ；ｍｉː／ｐｒｏｎ．（Ｉ的宾格）我
（３１）
ｍｅａｌ／ｍｉːｌ／ｎ．一顿饭
（９８）
∗ｍｅｅｔ／ｍｉːｔ／ｖ．结识；遇见
（２）
ｍｅｍｂｅｒ／ˈｍｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．成员；会员
（３３）
Vocabulary
146
∗ｍｉｄｄｌｅ／ˈｍＩｄｌ／ａｄｊ．中间的 ｎ．中间
（３４）
ｍｉｄｎｉｇｈｔ／ˈｍＩｄｎａＩｔ／ｎ．午夜
（１０７）
∗ｍｉｌｋ／ｍＩｌｋ／ｎ．（牛或羊等的）奶
（８４）
∗Ｍｉｓｓ／ｍＩｓ／ｎ．小姐；女士
（２）
∗Ｍｏｎｄａｙ／ˈｍʌｎｄｅＩ；ˈｍʌｎｄｉ／ｎ．星期一（４４）
∗ｍｏｎｅｙ／ˈｍʌｎｉ／ｎ．钱币；钱；财产
（９２）
∗ｍｏｎｋｅｙ／ˈｍʌｋｉ／ｎ．猴子
（８３）
∗ｍｏｎｔｈ／ｍʌｎ／ｎ．月；一个月的时间
（９２）
∗ｍｏｏｎ／ｍｕːｎ／ｎ．月亮；月球
（９２）
ｍｏｏｎｃａｋｅ／ˈｍｕːｎｋｅＩｋ／ｎ．月饼
（９２）
ｍｏｒｅ／ｍɔː（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．更多的 ａｄｖ．更（５１）
∗ｍｏｒｎｉｎｇ／ˈｍɔːｎＩ／；／ˈｍɔːｒｎＩ／ｎ．上午（２）
ｍｏｓｔ／ｍəʊｓｔ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．大多数 ａｄｖ．最（２５）
∗ｍｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈｍʌðə（ｒ）／ｎ．母亲，妈妈
（２０）
ｍｏｕｎｔａｉｎ／ˈｍａʊｎｔəｎ／；／ˈｍａʊｎｔｎ／ｎ．高山；
山岳
（６７）
∗ｍｏｖｅ／ｍｕːｖ／ｖ．移动；搬（家）
（６７）
∗Ｍｒ／ˈｍＩｓｔə（ｒ）／（Ｍｒ．ＡｍＥ）ａｂｂｒ．先生
（１７）
∗Ｍｒｓ／ˈｍＩｓＩｚ／（Ｍｒｓ．ＡｍＥ）ａｂｂｒ．夫人（２８）
∗ｍｕｃｈ／ｍʌｔʃ ／ａｄｖ．非常；十分；很
ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．许多，大量
（１６）
∗ｍｕｓｉｃ／ˈｍｊｕːｚɪｋ／ｎ．音乐；音乐创作
（９）
∗ｍｙ／ｍａＩ／ｄｅｔ．我的
（２）
Ｎ
∗ｎａｍｅ／ｎｅＩｍ／ｎ．名字 ｖ．给……取名
（２）
ｎａｔｉｏｎａｌ／ˈｎæʃｎəｌ／ａｄｊ．国家的；民族的；
全国的
（４４）
ｎａｔｕｒｅ／ˈｎｅＩｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．自然界；自然
（７３）
∗ｎｅａｒ／ｎＩə（ｒ）／；／ｎＩｒ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……附近（４０）
ｎｅｅｄ／ｎｉːｄ／ｖ．需要；有必要 ｍｏｄａｌｖ．，ｎ．需要
（７）
∗ｎｅｖｅｒ／ˈｎｅｖə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．从不
（４０）
∗ｎｅｗ／ｎｊｕː／；／ｎｕː／ａｄｊ．初来乍到的；
不熟悉的；新的；有别于从前的
（８）
∗ｎｅｘｔ／ｎｅｋｓｔ／ａｄｊ．紧挨着的；下一个的；
接下来的 ａｄｖ．紧接着；随后
（４２）
ｎｅｘｔｔｏｐｒｅｐ．紧邻，在……近旁；紧接
（４２）
∗ｎｉｃｅ／ｎａＩｓ／ａｄｊ．令人愉快的；友好的
（２）
∗ｎｉｇｈｔ／ｎａＩｔ／ｎ．夜；夜晚
（７８）
∗ｎｉｎｅ／ｎａＩｎ／ｎｕｍ．九
（１００）
∗ｎｉｎｅｔｅｅｎ／ˌｎａＩｎˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十九
（４）
∗ｎｉｎｅｔｙ／ˈｎａＩｎｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．九十
（１００）
∗ｎｉｎｔｈ／ｎａＩｎ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第九
（９２）
∗ｎｏ／ｎəʊ／ｅｘｃｌ．不；没有；不是
ｄｅｔ．没有；不准
（１１）
∗ｎｏｏｄｌｅ／ˈｎｕːｄｌ／ｎ．面条
（８９）
ｎｏｏｎ／ｎｕːｎ／ｎ．正午，中午
（２４）
ｎｏｒｔｈ／ｎɔː／；／ｎɔːｒ／ａｄｊ．北方的 ｎ．北方
（７８）
∗ｎｏｔ／ｎɒｔ／；／ｎːｔ／ａｄｖ．不，没有
（１１）
∗ｎｏｗ／ｎａʊ／ａｄｖ．现在；目前
（３８）
∗ｎｕｒｓｅ／ｎɜːｓ／；／ｎɜːｒｓ／ｎ．护士
（２０）
Ｏ
∗ｏｃｌｏｃｋ／əˈｋｌɒｋ／；／əˈｋｌːｋ／ａｄｖ．（表示
整点）……点钟
（３８）
∗Ｏｃｔｏｂｅｒ／ɒｋˈｔəʊｂə（ｒ）／；／ːｋˈｔəʊｂəｒ／
ｎ．十月
（１０２）
∗ｏｆ／əｖ／；／ʌｖ／ｐｒｅｐ．属于……的；关于（某人）
（２２）
∗ｏｆｔｅｎ／ˈɒｆｎ／；／ˈɔːｆｎ／ａｄｖ．时常；往往
（７）
∗ｏｌｄ／əʊｌｄ／ａｄｊ．年纪；结识久的；老的
（４）
Vocabulary 147
∗ｏｎ／ɒｎ／；／ːｎ／ｐｒｅｐ．在（某一天）；
在……上；通过；关于
（２４）
∗ｏｎｅ／ｗʌｎ／ｎｕｍ．，ｄｅｔ．一；一个
ｐｒｏｎ．其中的一个人（或事物）
（１０）
ｏｎｌｙ／ˈəʊｎｌｉ／ａｄｖ．只有；仅；只不过
ａｄｊ．仅有的；最适当的
（２２）
∗ｏｐｅｎ／ˈəʊｐəｎ／ｖ．开门，开业；打开；睁开；张开
ａｄｊ．开放；敞开的；张开的；展开的
（４３）
∗ｏｒ／ɔː（ｒ）／ｃｏｎｊ．或者；或者说；否则
（３０）
∗ｏｒａｎｇｅ／ˈɒｒＩｎｄʒ／；／ˈɔːｒＩｎｄʒ／ａｄｊ．橙红色的；
橘黄色的 ｎ．橙子；橙红色，橘黄色
（８２）
ｏｔｈｅｒ／ˈʌðə（ｒ）／ｐｒｏｎ．，ａｄｊ．另外；另一个（７）
∗ｏｕｒ／ː（ｒ）；ˈａʊə（ｒ）／ｄｅｔ．我们的
（１１）
∗ｏｕｔ／ａʊｔ／ａｄｖ．（从……里）出来；在外面；
外出
（５１）
ｏｕｔｄｏｏｒｓ／ˌａʊｔˈｄɔːｚ／；／ˌａʊｔˈｄɔːｒｚ／
ａｄｖ．在户外；在野外
（６０）
∗ｏｖｅｒ／ˈəʊｖə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．结束；穿过；又
ｐｒｅｐ．遍及；在……上面；穿越
（３８）
Ｐ
ｐａｇｅ／ｐｅɪｄʒ ／ｎ．页；页面
（５１）
∗ｐａｉｒ／ｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｐｅｒ／ｎ．由两个相连接
部分组成的物体；俩；一双
（７０）
∗ｐａｎｄａ／ˈｐæｎｄə ／ｎ．大熊猫；小熊猫
（７８）
∗ｐａｐｅｒ／ˈｐｅＩｐə（ｒ）／ｎ．纸
（９６）
∗ｐａｒｅｎｔ／ˈｐｅəｒəｎｔ／；／ˈｐｅｒəｎｔ／ｎ．父亲；母亲
（２４）
∗ｐａｒｋ／ｐːｋ／；／ｐːｒｋ／ｎ．公园 ｖ．停（车）
（２４）
ｐａｒｔ／ｐːｔ／；／ｐːｒｔ／ｎ．参与；部分
（４６）
ｐａｓｓ／ｐːｓ／；／ｐæｓ／ｖ．传球；及格；通过；传递
ｎ．及格
（６２）
ｐａｓｔ／ｐːｓｔ／；／ｐæｓｔ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……之后
ｎ．过去 ａｄｊ．从前的；刚过去的
（３８）
∗ＰＥ／ˌｐｉː ˈｉː／（ｐｈｙｓｉｃａｌｅｄｕｃａｔｉｏｎ）
ｎ．体育（课）
（２２）
∗ｐｅｎｃｉｌ／ˈｐｅｎｓｌ／ｎ．铅笔
（４８）
∗ｐｅｏｐｌｅ／ˈｐｉːｐｌ／ｎ．（ｐｌ．）人；人们；国民（２２）
∗ｐｈｏｎｅ／ｆəʊｎ／ｎ．电话系统；手机
（５８）
∗ｐｈｏｔｏ／ˈｆəʊｔəʊ／（ｐｈｏｔｏｇｒａｐｈ／ˈｆəʊｔəｇｒːｆ／；
／ˈｆəʊｔəｇｒæｆ／）ｎ．照片
（２２）
ｐｉｃｎｉｃ／ˈｐＩｋｎＩｋ／ｎ．，ｖ．野餐
（５６）
∗ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ／ˈｐＩｋｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．图画；照片
ｖ．想象
（１３）
∗ｐｉｎｇ⁃ｐｏｎｇｎ．乒乓球运动
（４８）
∗ｐｉｎｋ／ｐＩｋ／ａｄｊ．粉红色的 ｎ．粉红色（２０）
∗ｐｌａｃｅ／ｐｌｅＩｓ／ｎ．地方；场所 ｖ．放置
（７５）
∗ｐｌａｎｅ／ｐｌｅＩｎ／ｎ．飞机
（４０）
∗ｐｌａｎｔ／ｐｌːｎｔ／；／ｐｌæｎｔ／ｎ．植物 ｖ．种植（７４）
∗ｐｌａｙ／ｐｌｅＩ／ｖ．参加比赛；玩耍；演奏
ｎ．戏剧
（２）
∗ｐｌａｙｇｒｏｕｎｄ／ˈｐｌｅＩｒａʊｎｄ／ｎ．操场
（４２）
∗ｐｌｅａｓｅ／ｐｌｉːｚ／ｅｘｃｌ．请；太好了
（２）
ｐｌｅｎｔｙ／ˈｐｌｅｎｔｉ／ｐｒｏｎ．大量；充足
（８０）
ｐ．ｍ．／ˌｐｉːˈｅｍ／ａｂｂｒ．下午，午后
（４３）
ｐｏｌｉｃｅｗｏｍａｎ／ｐəˈｌｉːｓｗʊｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｐｏｌｉｃｅｗｏｍｅｎ
／ｐəˈｌｉːｓｗＩｍＩｎ／）ｎ．女警察
（２０）
ｐｏｓｔｅｒ／ˈｐəʊｓｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．海报；招贴画
（１０５）
ｐｒｅｐａｒｅ／ｐｒＩˈｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｐｒＩˈｐｅｒ／ｖ．使做好
准备；做（饭）
（１０３）
ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔ／ˈｐｒｅｚｎｔ／ｎ．礼物 ａｄｊ．当前的
（９６）
Vocabulary
148
ｐｒｅｔｔｙ／ˈｐｒＩｔｉ／ａｄｊ．漂亮的；美观的
ａｄｖ．相当；非常
（２２）
∗ｐｕｔ／ｐʊｔ／ｖ．放；安置
（４３）
Ｑ
ｑｕａｒｔｅｒ／ˈｋｗɔːｔə（ｒ）／；／ˈｋｗɔːｒｔəｒ／ｎ．一刻钟；
四分之一；季度
（３８）
∗ｑｕｅｓｔｉｏｎ／ˈｋｗｅｓｔʃəｎ／ｎ．问题
（４５）
∗ｑｕｉｅｔ／ˈｋｗａＩəｔ／ａｄｊ．文静的；安静的
（６）
Ｒ
∗ｒａｂｂｉｔ／ˈｒæｂＩｔ／ｎ．兔
（２０）
ｒａｃｅ／ｒｅＩｓ／ｎ．赛跑；速度竞赛
（７１）
∗ｒａｉｎ／ｒｅＩｎ／ｎ．雨；雨水 ｖ．下雨
（５７）
ｒａｉｎｆｏｒｅｓｔ／ˈｒｅＩｎｆɒｒＩｓｔ／；／ˈｒｅＩｎｆɔːｒＩｓｔ／
ｎ．（热带）雨林
（７４）
ｒａｉｎｙ／ˈｒｅＩｎｉ／ａｄｊ．阴雨的；多雨的
（６０）
ｒａｉｓｅ／ｒｅＩｚ／ｖ．提升，举起；增加；筹募；抚养
（４４）
∗ｒｅａｄ／ｒｉːｄ／ｖ．阅读；朗读；读到
（２）
ｒｅａｌｌｙ／ˈｒｉːəｌｉ；ˈｒＩəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．（加强形容词或
副词的语气）；确实；真正地
（１６）
∗ｒｅｄ／ｒｅｄ／ｎ．红色 ａｄｊ．红色的
（６５）
ｒｅｍｅｍｂｅｒ／ｒＩˈｍｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｖ．纪念；记住；
记起；记着
（９４）
ｒｅｐｕｂｌｉｃ／ｒＩˈｐʌｂｌＩｋ／ｎ．共和国
（１０６）
ｒｅｓｔ／ｒｅｓｔ／ｎ．休息时间；其余
（８４）
ｒｅｓｔａｕｒａｎｔ／ˈｒｅｓｔｒɒｎｔ／；／ˈｒｅｓｔｒːｎｔ／ｎ．餐馆；
餐厅
（２２）
ｒｅｓｕｌｔ／ｒＩˈｚʌｌｔ／ｎ．结果；后果；成果
（６９）
∗ｒｉｃｅ／ｒａＩｓ／ｎ．大米
（８９）
ｒｉｄｄｌｅ／ˈｒＩｄｌ／ｎ．谜；谜语
（１０３）
ｒｉｄｅ／ｒａＩｄ／ｖ．骑；驾驶
（２８）
∗ｒｉｇｈｔ／ｒａＩｔ／ａｄｊ．适当的；正确的；右边的
ｎ．右边；权利
（６１）
ｒｉｎｇ／ｒＩ／ｖ．（使）发出钟声 ｎ．钟声；指环
（１０７）
∗ｒｉｖｅｒ／ˈｒＩｖə（ｒ）／ｎ．河；江
（８９）
∗ｒｏｏｍ／ｒｕːｍ；ｒʊｍ／ｎ．房间；空间
（５２）
∗ｒｕｌｅｒ／ˈｒｕːｌə（ｒ）／ｎ．直尺
（４８）
∗ｒｕｎ／ｒʌｎ／ｖ．跑步；跑
（６）
Ｓ
∗Ｓａｔｕｒｄａｙ／ˈｓæｔəｄｅＩ／；／ˈｓæｔəｒｄｅＩ／ｎ．星期六
（２４）
∗ｓａｙ／ｓｅＩ／ｖ．说；指示
（１０７）
∗ｓｃｈｏｏｌ／ｓｋｕːｌ／ｎ．学校；上学；上课时间（８）
∗ｓｃｈｏｏｌｂａｇ／ˈｓｋｕːｌｂæ／ｎ．书包
（４８）
∗ｓｃｉｅｎｃｅ／ˈｓａＩəｎｓ／ｎ．科学
（２）
∗ｓｅａ／ｓｉː／ｎ．海；海洋
（７４）
∗ｓｅａｓｏｎ／ˈｓｉːｚｎ／ｎ．季；季节
（５７）
∗ｓｅｃｏｎｄ／ˈｓｅｋəｎｄ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．，ｄｅｔ．第二
ｎ．秒
（１００）
∗ｓｅｅ／ｓｉː／ｖ．看见；理解；看
（４）
ｓｅｌｄｏｍ／ˈｓｅｌｄəｍ／ａｄｖ．不常，很少
（４０）
∗Ｓｅｐｔｅｍｂｅｒ／ｓｅｐˈｔｅｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．九月
（９７）
ｓｅｔ／ｓｅｔ／ｖ．摆放餐具；设置；安排
ｎ．电视机；一套；一组
（２６）
∗ｓｅｖｅｎ／ˈｓｅｖｎ／ｎｕｍ．七
（６）
∗ｓｅｖｅｎｔｅｅｎ／ˌｓｅｖｎˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十七
（４）
ｓｈａｒｋ／ʃːｋ／；／ʃːｒｋ／ｎ．鲨鱼
（８３）
∗ｓｈｅ／ʃｉ；ʃｉː／ｐｒｏｎ．她
（８）
Vocabulary 149
∗ｓｈｉｐ／ʃＩｐ／ｎ．（大）船 ｖ．运输
（４０）
∗ｓｈｉｒｔ／ʃɜːｔ／；／ʃɜːｒｔ／ｎ．衬衫
（２０）
∗ｓｈｏｅ／ʃｕː／ｎ．鞋
（５８）
∗ｓｈｏｐ／ʃɒｐ／；／ʃːｐ／ｖ．去商店买 ｎ．商店
（２４）
∗ｓｈｏｒｔ／ʃɔːｔ／；／ʃɔːｒｔ／ａｄｊ．个子矮的；
短暂的；短的
（６）
∗ｓｈｏｒｔｓ／ʃɔːｔｓ／；／ʃɔːｒｔｓ／ｎ．短裤
（７０）
∗ｓｈｏｕｌｄ／ʃʊｄ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．可以；应当
（９７）
∗ｓｈｏｗ／ʃəʊ／ｖ．展示；教；表明 ｎ．（电视或
广播）节目
（２５）
ｓｉｄｅ／ｓａＩｄ／ｎ．一边；一侧
（７１）
∗ｓｉｎｇ／ｓＩ／ｖ．唱（歌）
（２）
∗ｓｉｓｔｅｒ／ˈｓＩｓｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．姐姐；妹妹
（２０）
∗ｓｉｘ／ｓＩｋｓ／ｎｕｍ．六
（８）
∗ｓｉｘｔｅｅｎ／ˌｓＩｋｓˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十六
（４）
ｓｋｉ／ｓｋｉː／ｖ．滑雪（运动）
（６７）
ｓｋｙ／ｓｋａＩ／ｎ．天；天空
（８２）
∗ｓｍａｌｌ／ｓｍɔːｌ／ａｄｊ．小的；年幼的
（２５）
∗ｓｎｏｗ／ｓｎəʊ／ｖ．下雪 ｎ．雪
（５６）
ｓｎｏｗｍａｎ／ˈｓｎəʊｍæｎ／ｎ．雪人
（５６）
∗ｓｏ／ｓəʊ／ａｄｖ．如此，极；那么；这样
ｃｏｎｊ．所以
（２２）
∗ｓｏｍｅ／ｓʌｍ／ｄｅｔ．一些；某些
ｐｒｏｎ．有些人，有些事物
（２５）
ｓｏｍｅｔｈｉｎｇ／ˈｓʌｍＩ／ｐｒｏｎ．某事；某物
（２６）
∗ｓｏｍｅｔｉｍｅｓ／ˈｓʌｍｔａＩｍｚ／ａｄｖ．有时
（３１）
ｓｏｎ／ｓʌｎ／ｎ．儿子
（２８）
∗ｓｏｎｇ／ｓɒ／；／ｓɔː／ｎ．歌曲
（４３）
∗ｓｏｒｒｙ／ˈｓɒｒｉ／；／ˈｓːｒｉ／ｅｘｃｌ．很抱歉
ａｄｊ．歉疚；难过
（５８）
ｓｏｕｔｈ／ｓａʊ／ｎ．南方 ａｄｊ．南方的
（８５）
∗ｓｐｏｒｔ／ｓｐɔːｔ／；／ｓｐɔːｒｔ／ｎ．体育运动
（３１）
∗ｓｐｒｉｎｇ／ｓｐｒＩ／ｎ．春天；春季
（５６）
ｓｑｕａｒｅ／ｓｋｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ｓｋｗｅｒ／ｎ．广场；
正方形 ａｄｊ．正方形的
（１０２）
∗ｓｔａｒ／ｓｔː（ｒ）／ｎ．明星；星
（６２）
ｓｔａｒｔ／ｓｔːｔ／；／ｓｔːｒｔ／ｖ．开始 ｎ．开头
（４４）
∗ｓｔｏｐ／ｓｔɒｐ／；／ｓｔːｐ／ｎ．车站；停止
ｖ．停下；阻止；停止
（４０）
∗ｓｔｒｅｅｔ／ｓｔｒｉːｔ／ｎ．街道
（１０２）
∗ｓｔｒｏｎｇ／ｓｔｒɒ／；／ｓｔｒɔː／ａｄｊ．强壮的
（６）
∗ｓｔｕｄｅｎｔ／ˈｓｔｊｕːｄｎｔ／；／ˈｓｔｕːｄｎｔ／ｎ．学生（２０）
∗ｓｔｕｄｙ／ˈｓｔʌｄｉ／ｖ．学习 ｎ．学习；书房
（３４）
∗ｓｕｂｊｅｃｔ／ˈｓʌｂｄʒＩｋｔ；ˈｓʌｂｄʒｅｋｔ／ｎ．科目
（３９）
ｓｕｃｈ／ｓʌｔʃ ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．这样；这样的，那样的
（１３）
∗ｓｕｍｍｅｒ／ˈｓʌｍə（ｒ）／ｎ．夏天；夏季
（５６）
∗ｓｕｎ／ｓʌｎ／ｎ．太阳；阳光
（５５）
∗Ｓｕｎｄａｙ／ˈｓʌｎｄｅＩ；ˈｓʌｎｄｉ／ｎ．星期日
（１０６）
∗ｓｕｎｎｙ／ˈｓʌｎｉ／ａｄｊ．阳光充足的
（５６）
ｓｕｒｖｅｙ／ˈｓɜːｖｅＩ／；／ˈｓɜːｒｖｅＩ／ｎ．民意调查（６９）
∗ｓｗｅｅｐ／ｓｗｉːｐ／ｖ．，ｎ．打扫，清扫
（９２）
∗ｓｗｉｍ／ｓｗＩｍ／ｖ．游泳；游动
（１２）
Ｔ
∗ｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｔｅＩｂｌ／ｎ．桌子；表
（２６）
ＴａｉＣｈｉ／ˈｔａＩˈｔʃｉː／ｎ．太极
（６６）
∗ｔａｉｌ／ｔｅＩｌ／ｎ．尾；尾巴
（７８）
∗ｔａｋｅ／ｔｅＩｋ／ｖ．乘坐；带去；携带；拍照
（４０）
Vocabulary
150
∗ｔａｌｋ／ｔɔːｋ／ｖ．说话；讨论
（１６）
∗ｔａｌｌ／ｔɔːｌ／ａｄｊ．高的；身高
（６）
ｔｅａｃｈ／ｔｉːｔʃ ／ｖ．教授；教导；教
（２２）
∗ｔｅａｃｈｅｒ／ˈｔｉːｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．教师
（２０）
ｔｅａｍ／ｔｉːｍ／ｎ．队；组
（６２）
∗ｔｅｌｌ／ｔｅｌ／ｖ．告诉；识别；说
（３１）
∗ｔｅｎ／ｔｅｎ／ｎｕｍ．十
（３８）
ｔｅｘｔ／ｔｅｋｓｔ／ｎ．文章；文本，正文；课本
（２５）
∗ｔｈａｎｋ／æｋ／ｖ．谢谢，感谢（某人）
（９４）
∗ｔｈａｔ／ðæｔ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．那，那个
（１１）
∗ｔｈｅ／ðｉː；ðə ／ａｒｔ．（用以泛指）；（解说时用）
（８）
∗ｔｈｅｉｒ／ðｅə（ｒ）／；／ðｅｒ／ｄｅｔ．他们的；
她们的；它们的
（２５）
∗ｔｈｅｍ／ðｅｍ；ðəｍ／ｐｒｏｎ．他们；她们；它们
（２６）
ｔｈｅｍｓｅｌｖｅｓ／ðəｍˈｓｅｌｖｚ／ｐｒｏｎ．他们自己；
她们自己；它们自己
（１００）
∗ｔｈｅｎ／ðｅｎ／ａｄｖ．然后；当时；那么
（９６）
∗ｔｈｅｒｅ／ðｅə（ｒ）／；／ðｅｒ／ａｄｖ．（表示存在或
发生）；在那里
（２２）
∗ｔｈｅｓｅ／ðｉːｚ／ｄｅｔ．这些
（７９）
∗ｔｈｅｙ／ðｅＩ／ｐｒｏｎ．他们；她们；它们
（９）
∗ｔｈｉｎ／Ｉｎ／ａｄｊ．瘦的；薄的
（６）
ｔｈｉｎｇ／Ｉ／ｎ．事件；东西
（１３）
∗ｔｈｉｎｋ／Ｉｋ／ｖ．认为；思考；想
（７９）
ｔｈｉｎｋｅｒ／ˈＩｋə（ｒ）／ｎ．思想家
（９７）
∗ｔｈｉｒｄ／ɜːｄ／；／ɜːｒｄ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第三
（１００）
∗ｔｈｉｒｔｅｅｎ／ˌɜːˈｔｉːｎ／；／ˌɜːｒˈｔｉːｎ／ｎｕｍ．十三
（４）
∗ｔｈｉｒｔｅｅｎｔｈ／ˌɜːˈｔｉːｎ／；／ˌɜːｒˈｔｉːｎ／
ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第十三
（１００）
∗ｔｈｉｓ／ðＩｓ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．这，这个
（４）
∗ｔｈｒｅｅ／ｒｉː／ｎｕｍ．三
（６）
∗Ｔｈｕｒｓｄａｙ／ˈɜːｚｄｅＩ／；／ˈɜːｒｚｄｅＩ／ｎ．星期四
（３９）
∗ｔｉｄｙ／ˈｔａＩｄｉ／ａｄｊ．整洁的 ｖ．使整洁
（４２）
ｔｉｅ／ｔａＩ／ｎ．领带 ｖ．系；捆绑；打结
（２０）
∗ｔｉｍｅ／ｔａＩｍ／ｎ．时间；一段时间；次；时刻（１３）
ｔｉｐ／ｔＩｐ／ｎ．实用的提示；小费；尖端
（６１）
∗ｔｏ／ｔｕː／ｉｎｆ．ｍ．（表示想做的事）；（表示
目的或意图）；（表示结果或原因）
ｐｒｅｐ．向；到
（２）
∗ｔｏｄａｙ／ｔəˈｄｅɪ／ａｄｖ．在今天 ｎ．今天；当今（５６）
ｔｏｇｅｔｈｅｒ／ｔəˈｅðə（ｒ）／ａｄｖ．在一起；共同（７）
∗ｔｏｍａｔｏ／ｔəˈｍːｔəʊ／；／ｔəˈｍｅＩｔəʊ／ｎ．番茄
（４６）
ｔｏｍｂ／ｔｕːｍ／ｎ．坟墓
（９２）
∗ｔｏｏ／ｔｕː／ａｄｖ．也；太；非常
（２）
∗ｔｏｐ／ｔɒｐ／；／ｔːｐ／ｎ．顶部 ａｄｊ．最高的（７４）
∗ｔｏｙ／ｔɔＩ／ｎ．玩具
（２０）
ｔｒａｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ／ｔｒəˈｄＩʃəｎｌ／ａｄｊ．传统的
（１０５）
∗ｔｒａｉｎ／ｔｒｅＩｎ／ｎ．火车 ｖ．训练；培训
（４０）
∗ｔｒａｖｅｌ／ˈｔｒæｖｌ／ｖ．，ｎ．旅行；游历
（６７）
∗ｔｒｅｅ／ｔｒｉː／ｎ．树木
（２５）
∗Ｔｕｅｓｄａｙ／ˈｔｊｕːｚｄｅＩ／；／ˈｔｕːｚｄｅＩ／ｎ．星期二
（４３）
∗ｔｕｒｎ／ｔɜːｎ／；／ｔɜːｒｎ／ｎ．转弯；机会
ｖ．转弯；转身；翻；成为
（６７）
∗ＴＶ／ˌｔｉː ˈｖｉː／（ｔｅｌｅｖｉｓｉｏｎ／ˈｔｅｌＩｖＩʒｎ／）ｎ．电视
（２４）
Vocabulary 151
∗ｔｗｅｌｆｔｈ／ｔｗｅｌｆ／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第十二（１００）
∗ｔｗｅｌｖｅ／ｔｗｅｌｖ／ｎｕｍ．十二
（４）
∗ｔｗｅｎｔｉｅｔｈ／ˈｔｗｅｎｔｉə／ｏｒｄｉｎａｌｎｕｍ．第二十
（１００）
∗ｔｗｅｎｔｙ／ˈｔｗｅｎｔｉ／ｎｕｍ．二十
（４）
∗ｔｗｏ／ｔｕː／ｎｕｍ．二
（１０）
Ｕ
∗ｕｎｃｌｅ／ˈʌｋｌ／ｎ．叔；伯；舅；姑父；姨父（２０）
∗ｕｎｄｅｒ／ˈʌｎｄə（ｒ）／ｐｒｅｐ．在……下面
（８４）
ｕｎｄｅｒｇｒｏｕｎｄ／ˈʌｎｄəｇｒａʊｎｄ／；／ˈʌｎｄəｒｇｒａʊｎｄ／
ｎ．地铁
（４０）
ｕｎｄｅｒｓｔａｎｄ／ˌʌｎｄəˈｓｔæｎｄ／；／ˌʌｎｄəｒˈｓｔæｎｄ／
ｖ．理解；了解
（８３）
∗ｕｐ／ʌｐ／ａｄｖ．，ｐｒｅｐ．彻底；向上
（２６）
∗ｕｓ／ʌｓ；əｓ／ｐｒｏｎ．我们
（２２）
∗ｕｓｅ／ｊｕːｚ／ｖ．使用
（６４）
ｕｓｕａｌｌｙ／ˈｊｕːʒｕəｌｉ；ˈｊｕːʒəｌｉ／ａｄｖ．经常地
（４０）
Ｖ
∗ｖｅｇｅｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｖｅｄʒｔəｂｌ／ｎ．蔬菜
（８９）
∗ｖｅｒｙ／ˈｖｅｒｉ／ａｄｖ．很，非常
（８）
∗ｖｉｓｉｔ／ˈｖＩｚＩｔ／ｖ．访问；参观
（２４）
Ｗ
∗ｗａｌｋ／ｗɔːｋ／ｖ．遛；步行 ｎ．散步
（２４）
∗ｗａｎｔ／ｗɒｎｔ／；／ｗːｎｔ／ｖ．想要；需要
（５２）
∗ｗａｒｍ／ｗɔːｍ／；／ｗɔːｒｍ／ａｄｊ．温暖的；
保暖的；热心的 ｖ．变暖和
（５６）
∗ｗａｔｃｈ／ｗɒｔʃ ／；／ｗːｔʃ／ｖ．观看；关注
（２４）
∗ｗａｔｅｒ／ˈｗɔːｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．水 ｖ．浇水
（４３）
ｗａｔｅｒｆａｌｌ／ˈｗɔːｔəｆɔːｌ／；／ˈｗɔːｔəｒｆɔːｌ／ｎ．瀑布（７４）
∗ｗａｙ／ｗｅＩ／ｎ．方式；方面；路
（４０）
∗ｗｅ／ｗｉː；ｗｉ／ｐｒｏｎ．我们；人们
（４）
∗ｗｅａｒ／ｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ｗｅｒ／ｖ．穿；戴
（２０）
∗ｗｅａｔｈｅｒ／ˈｗｅðə（ｒ）／ｎ．天气
（５６）
ｗｅｂ／ｗｅｂ／ｎ．万维网
（５１）
∗Ｗｅｄｎｅｓｄａｙ／ˈｗｅｎｚｄｅＩ；ˈｗｅｎｚｄｉ／ｎ．星期三
（３８）
∗ｗｅｅｋ／ｗｉːｋ／ｎ．周；一周
（６９）
ｗｅｅｋｅｎｄ／ˌｗｉːｋˈｅｎｄ／；／ˈｗｉːｋｅｎｄ／ｎ．周末（２６）
∗ｗｅｌｃｏｍｅ／ˈｗｅｌｋəｍ／ｅｘｃｌ．，ｖ．欢迎
ａｄｊ．受欢迎的
（５１）
∗ｗｅｌｌ／ｗｅｌ／ａｄｖ．好 ｎ．井，水井
（２９）
ｗｅｔ／ｗｅｔ／ａｄｊ．潮湿的
（７４）
∗ｗｈａｔ／ｗɒｔ／；／ｗʌｔ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．什么；
无论什么；多么
（２）
∗ｗｈｅｎ／ｗｅｎ／ａｄｖ．何时 ｃｏｎｊ．当……时（６６）
∗ｗｈｅｒｅ／ｗｅə（ｒ）／；／ｗｅｒ／ａｄｖ．在哪里
（４）
∗ｗｈｉｃｈ／ｗＩｔʃ／ｐｒｏｎ．，ｄｅｔ．哪一个，哪一些（４）
∗ｗｈｉｔｅ／ｗａＩｔ／ａｄｊ．白色的 ｎ．白色
（２０）
∗ｗｈｏ／ｈｕː／ｐｒｏｎ．谁
（８）
∗ｗｈｏｓｅ／ｈｕːｚ／ｄｅｔ．，ｐｒｏｎ．谁的
（２８）
∗ｗｈｙ／ｗａＩ／ａｄｖ．为什么
（５７）
ｗｉｌｄ／ｗａＩｌｄ／ａｄｊ．野生的；荒凉的
（８４）
∗ｗｉｌｌ／ｗＩｌ／ｍｏｄａｌｖ．（谈及将来）；会
（８５）
∗ｗｉｎ／ｗＩｎ／ｖ．获胜，赢
（６２）
ｗｉｎｄ／ｗＩｎｄ／ｎ．风
（７１）
∗ｗｉｎｄｏｗ／ˈｗＩｎｄəʊ／ｎ．窗户
（７６）
∗ｗｉｎｄｙ／ˈｗＩｎｄｉ／ａｄｊ．多风的；风大的
（８２）
∗ｗｉｎｔｅｒ／ˈｗＩｎｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．冬天；冬季
（５６）
∗ｗｉｓｈ／ｗＩʃ／ｎ．心愿；祝愿 ｖ．希望；祝愿（６２）
Vocabulary
152
∗ｗｉｔｈ／ｗɪð；ｗɪ／ｐｒｅｐ．和；有；用
（１３）
∗ｗｏｍａｎ／ˈｗʊｍəｎ／（ｐｌ．ｗｏｍｅｎ／ˈｗＩｍＩｎ／）
ｎ．妇女；女性
（２０）
ｗｏｎｄｅｒ／ˈｗʌｎｄə（ｒ）／ｎ．奇迹 ｖ．想知道（８０）
∗ｗｏｎｄｅｒｆｕｌ／ˈｗʌｎｄəｆｌ／；／ˈｗʌｎｄəｒｆｌ／
ａｄｊ．精彩的；绝妙的
（１０７）
∗ｗｏｒｄ／ｗɜːｄ／；／ｗɜːｒｄ／ｎ．话语；词，字（９７）
∗ｗｏｒｋ／ｗɜːｋ／；／ｗɜːｒｋ／ｖ．从事……工作；
运转 ｎ．工作；作品
（２２）
∗ｗｏｒｋｅｒ／ˈｗɜːｋə（ｒ）／；／ˈｗɜːｒｋəｒ／
ｎ．工人；工作者
（２０）
∗ｗｏｒｌｄ／ｗɜːｌｄ／；／ｗɜːｒｌｄ／ｎ．世界
（８９）
∗ｗｒｉｔｅ／ｒａＩｔ／ｖ．书写；写作；写信
（７１）
ｗｒｉｔｅｒ／ˈｒａＩｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．作家
（５３）
Ｙ
∗ｙｅａｒ／ｊＩə（ｒ）／；／ｊＩｒ／ｎ．年龄；年；一年时间
（４）
∗ｙｅｌｌｏｗ／ˈｊｅｌəʊ／ａｄｊ．黄色的 ｎ．黄色
（２０）
∗ｙｅｓ／ｊｅｓ／ｅｘｃｌ．（答话时表示正确或真实）；
（表示同意所说的话）；（接受提议或
邀请）
（１１）
∗ｙｏｕ／ｊｕː／ｐｒｏｎ．你；你们
（２）
∗ｙｏｕｎｇ／ｊʌ／ａｄｊ．年轻的；幼小的；青年的
（７）
∗ｙｏｕｒ／ｊɔː（ｒ）／；／ｊʊｒ／ｄｅｔ．你的；你们的（２）
ｙｏｕｒｓｅｌｆ／ｊɔːˈｓｅｌｆ／；／ｊɔːｒˈｓｅｌｆ／（ｐｌ．ｙｏｕｒｓｅｌｖｅｓ
／ｊɔːˈｓｅｌｖｚ／；／ｊɔːｒˈｓｅｌｖｚ／）ｐｒｏｎ．你自己
（１１）
ｙｏ－ｙｏ／ˈｊəʊ ｊəʊ／ｎ．悠悠球
（６０）
Ｚ
∗ｚｏｏ／ｚｕː／ｎ．动物园
（７０）
Useful Expressions in Each Unit 153
ＵｓｅｆｕｌＥｘｐｒｅｓｓｉｏｎｓｉｎＥａｃｈＵｎｉｔ
Ｕｎｉｔ１
ｇｏｏｄｍｏｒｎｉｎｇ早上好
（２）
ｌｉｋｅ／ｌｏｖｅ／ｅｎｊｏｙｄｏｉｎｇｓｔｈ．喜欢做某事
（２）
ｂｅｆｒｏｍ来自
（４）
ｈｅｌｐｅａｃｈｏｔｈｅｒ互相帮助
（７）
ｐｌａｙｆｏｏｔｂａｌｌ踢足球
（７）
ｐｌａｙｔｈｅｇｕｉｔａｒ弹吉他
（８）
ｂｅｈａｐｐｙｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．乐意做某事
（８）
ｌｉｓｔｅｎｔｏｍｕｓｉｃ听音乐
（１０）
ｄｒａｗｐｉｃｔｕｒｅｓ（ｄｒａｗａｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ）画画
（１３）
ｓｕｃｈａｓ例如
（１３）
ａｔｓｃｈｏｏｌ在学校
（１６）
ｌｉｋｅｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．喜欢做某事
（１６）
Ｕｎｉｔ２
ｏｎＳａｔｕｒｄａｙｓ在（每）周六
（２４）
ｐｌａｙｂａｓｋｅｔｂａｌｌ打篮球
（２４）
ｉｎｔｈｅｍｏｒｎｉｎｇ／ａｆｔｅｒｎｏｏｎ在上午／下午
（２４）
ｈｅｌｐｓｂ．（ｔｏ）ｄｏｓｔｈ．帮助某人做某事
（２４）
ａｔｎｏｏｎ在中午
（２４）
ｗａｔｃｈＴＶ看电视
（２４）
ｄｏｃｈｏｒｅｓ做家务
（２４）
ｇｏｔｏｔｈｅｐａｒｋ去公园
（２４）
ｇｏｓｈｏｐｐｉｎｇ逛商店
（２４）
ｗａｌｋｔｈｅｄｏｇ遛狗
（２４）
ｌｉｖｅｗｉｔｈｓｂ．和某人一起住
（２５）
ｏｎｗｅｅｋｅｎｄｓ在（每）周末
（２６）
ｓｅｔｔｈｅｔａｂｌｅ摆放餐具
（２６）
ｃｌｅａｎｕｐ打扫
（２６）
ｔｅｌｌｓｂ．ａｂｏｕｔ．．．告诉某人关于……
（３１）
ｄｏｓｐｏｒｔｓ做运动
（３１）
ｗａｔｃｈｆｉｌｍｓ看电影
（３１）
ａｔｈｏｍｅ在家
（３１）
ｐｌａｙｗｉｔｈｓｂ．／ｓｔｈ．与某人或某物玩耍
（３４）
ｍｉｄｄｌｅｓｃｈｏｏｌ初中
（３４）
ｌｉｖｅｉｎ居住在……
（３５）
ｌｏｏｋａｆｔｅｒ照顾，照料
（３５）
Ｕｎｉｔ３
ｂｙｕｎｄｅｒｇｒｏｕｎｄ／ｐｌａｎｅ／ｃａｒ／ｔｒａｉｎ／ｓｈｉｐ／ｂｕｓ／ｂｏａｔ．．．
乘地铁／飞机／小汽车／火车／（大）船／
公共汽车／船（舟）……
（４０）
ｂｙｂｉｋｅ骑自行车
（４０）
ｏｎｆｏｏｔ步行
（４０）
ｔａｌｋａｂｏｕｔ讨论，谈论
（４０）
ｈｏｗ／ｗｈａｔａｂｏｕｔ．．．……怎么样
（４０）
ｆａｒｆｒｏｍ远离
（４０）
ｔａｋｅｔｈｅｕｎｄｅｒｇｒｏｕｎｄ乘地铁
（４０）
Useful Expressions in Each Unit
154
ａｌｏｔｏｆ／ｌｏｔｓｏｆ许多，大量
（４２）
ｐｕｔｏｎ举办；上演；展出
（４３）
ｏｎｔｈｅｐｌａｙｇｒｏｕｎｄ在操场
（４４）
ａｎｓｗｅｒｑｕｅｓｔｉｏｎｓ回答问题
（４５）
ｔａｋｅｐｈｏｔｏｓ／ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅｓ拍照
（４６）
ａｔｔｈｅｓｔａｒｔ（ｏｆｓｔｈ．）开始时
（４６）
ｔａｋｅｐａｒｔｉｎ参加
（４６）
ｐｌａｙｓｐｏｒｔｓ做运动
（４９）
ｈａｖｅｇｒｅａｔｆｕｎ非常开心
（５１）
ｆｉｎｄｏｕｔ发现，查明
（５１）
ｗａｎｔｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．想要做某事
（５２）
ｌｅａｒｎａｂｏｕｔ．．．了解，学习关于……
（５３）
Ｕｎｉｔ４
ｔａｋｅｓｂ．ｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．带某人去做某事
（５６）
ｇｏｈｉｋｉｎｇ去远足；去徒步旅行
（５６）
ｈａｖｅａｐｉｃｎｉｃ野餐
（５６）
ｇｏｓｗｉｍｍｉｎｇ去游泳
（５７）
ｔａｌｋｏｎｔｈｅｐｈｏｎｅ打电话交谈
（５８）
ｐｕｔｏｎ．．．穿上／戴上……
（５８）
ｂｅｇｏｏｄａｔ．．．擅长……；精通……
（５８）
ｌｅａｒｎｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．学习做某事
（５８）
ａｓｋｓｂ．ｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．邀请／要求某人做某事（５８）
ａｌｌｙｅａｒｌｏｎｇ常年；一年四季
（６０）
ｂｅｇｏｏｄｆｏｒ．．．对……有益
（６１）
ｎｅｅｄｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．需要做某事
（６１）
ｔａｋｅｓｔｈ．ｗｉｔｈｓｂ．某人携带某物
（６１）
ｗａｒｍｕｐ热身
（６１）
ｇｉｖｅｕｐ放弃
（６２）
ｉｎｔｈｅｅｎｄ最终，最后
（６２）
ｐｌａｙｆｏｒ．．．为……效力
（６２）
ｗｉｔｈｔｈｅｈｅｌｐｏｆｓｂ．在某人的帮助下
（６２）
ａｍｅｍｂｅｒｏｆ．．．……的一员
（６２）
ｐａｓｓｓｔｈ．ｔｏｓｂ．／ｐａｓｓｓｂ．ｓｔｈ．把某物传递给某人
（６４）
ｕｓｅｓｔｈ．ｔｏｄｏｓｔｈ．用某物做某事
（６４）
ｒｉｄｅａｂｉｋｅ骑自行车
（６５）
ｌｏｏｋａｔ看
（６５）
ｂｙｔｈｅｌａｋｅ在湖边
（６５）
ｍａｋｅｔｕｒｎｓ转弯
（６７）
ｔａｋｅａｗａｌｋ散步
（７０）
ｗｒｉｔｅｄｏｗｎ写下
（７１）
Ｕｎｉｔ５
ｂｅｈｏｍｅｔｏ．．．是……所在地／栖息地
（７４）
ｍａｎｙｋｉｎｄｓｏｆ许多种类的
（７４）
ｏｎｔｈｅｔｏｐｏｆ．．．在……的顶部
（７４）
ｋｅｅｐｏｕｔ阻止或防止进入
（７６）
ａｔｎｉｇｈｔ在夜里
（７８）
ｉｎｔｈｅｄａｙ在白天
（７８）
ａｓｅａｏｆ大量
（７９）
ｄｉｆｆｅｒｅｎｔｋｉｎｄｓｏｆ不同种类的
（７９）
ｐｌｅｎｔｙｏｆ大量
（８０）
ｇｉｖｅｓｔｈ．ｔｏｓｂ．／ｇｉｖｅｓｂ．ｓｔｈ．把某物给某人（８４）
ｈａｖｅａｒｅｓｔ休息一会儿
（８４）
ｂｅｉｍｐｏｒｔａｎｔｔｏｓｂ．对某人重要
（８４）
ｃｏｍｅｆｒｏｍ来自
（８５）
ｊｏｉｎｉｎ参加，加入
（８５）
ｆｅｅｄｏｎ．．．以……为食
（８８）
ｍａｋｅａｎｙｆｉｒｅ／ｍａｋｅａｆｉｒｅ生火
（８９）
Useful Expressions in Each Unit 155
ｍａｉｎｆｏｏｄ主食
（８９）
Ｕｎｉｔ６
ＤｏｕｂｌｅＮｉｎｔｈＦｅｓｔｉｖａｌ重阳节
（９２）
ＳｐｒｉｎｇＦｅｓｔｉｖａｌ春节
（９２）
Ｍｉｄ⁃ＡｕｔｕｍｎＦｅｓｔｉｖａｌ中秋节
（９２）
Ｔｏｍｂ⁃ｓｗｅｅｐｉｎｇＤａｙ清明节
（９２）
ＤｒａｇｏｎＢｏａｔＦｅｓｔｉｖａｌ端午节
（９２）
ＬａｎｔｅｒｎＦｅｓｔｉｖａｌ元宵节
（９２）
ｅｎｊｏｙｔｈｅｍｏｏｎ赏月
（９２）
ｌｕｃｋｙｍｏｎｅｙ压岁钱
（９２）
ｓｗｅｅｐｔｈｅｔｏｍｂ（ｓ）扫墓
（９２）
ＬａｂｏｒＤａｙ五一劳动节
（９３）
ａｌｌｏｖｅｒｔｈｅｗｏｒｌｄ在世界上
（９３）
ｍａｋｅｃａｒｄｓ（ｍａｋｅａｃａｒｄ）制作卡片
（９６）
ｉｎｍａｎｙｗａｙｓ（ｉｎａｗａｙ）用许多方法；
在很多方面
（９７）
ｐｕｔｕｐ张贴，举起，搭建
（９８）
ＳｐｒｉｎｇＦｅｓｔｉｖａｌｃｏｕｐｌｅｔｓ春联
（９８）
ｔａｌｋｗｉｔｈ．．．与……交谈
（１０１）
ｐｒｅｐａｒｅｆｏｒ．．．为……做准备
（１０３）
ｇｕｅｓｓｔｈｅｌａｎｔｅｒｎｒｉｄｄｌｅｓ猜灯谜
（１０３）
ｔｈｅＰｅｏｐｌｅｓＲｅｐｕｂｌｉｃｏｆＣｈｉｎａ中华人民共和国
（１０６）
ｗａｔｃｈｌａｎｔｅｒｎｓｈｏｗｓ看灯展
（１０６）
ａｔｍｉｄｎｉｇｈｔ在午夜时刻
（１０７）
Attached Word List
156
ＡｔｔａｃｈｅｄＷｏｒｄＬｉｓｔ
ａｂｏｖｅ／əˈｂʌｖ／ａｄｖ．在（或向）上面
ｐｒｅｐ．在……上面
ａｃｃｏｒｄｉｎｇｔｏ按照；根据
ａｃｔ／æｋｔ／ｖ．扮演；行动 ｎ．行为；一段表演；
法案
ａｄｄ／æｄ／ｖ．增加；添加
ａｄｖｅｒｂ／ˈæｄｖɜːｂ／；／ˈæｄｖɜːｒｂ／ｎ．副词
ａｇａｉｎ／əˈｇｅＩｎ／ａｄｖ．再一次；复原；
请再说一遍；增加
ａｌｂｕｍ／ˈæｌｂəｍ／ｎ．相册；影集
ａｌｏｕｄ／əˈｌａʊｄ／ａｄｖ．出声地；大声地
ａｌｐｈａｂｅｔ／ˈæｌｆəｂｅｔ／ｎ．字母表
ａｍｏｎｇ／əˈｍʌ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……中
ａｎａｌｙｓｅ／ˈæｎəｌａＩｚ／（ａｎａｌｙｚｅＡｍＥ）ｖ．分析
ａｒｔｉｃｌｅ／ˈːｔＩｋｌ／；／ˈːｒｔＩｋｌ／ｎ．冠词
ａｔｔｅｎｔｉｏｎ／əˈｔｅｎʃｎ／ｎ．注意；专心；注意力
ｂａｓｅ／ｂｅＩｓ／ｖ．以……为据点
ｎ．根基；基础
ｂｅａｕｔｙ／ˈｂｊｕːｔｉ／ｎ．美；美丽
ｂｅｔｗｅｅｎ／ｂＩˈｔｗｉːｎ／ｐｒｅｐ．在……中间
ｂｌａｎｋ／ｂｌæｋ／ｎ．空白处，空格 ａｄｊ．空的
ｂｏｌｄ／ｂəʊｌｄ／ｎ．黑体；粗体
ｂｏｏｋｌｅｔ／ˈｂʊｋｌəｔ／ｎ．小册子
ｃａｐｉｔａｌ／ˈｋæｐＩｔｌ／ａｄｊ．大写的 ｎ．大写字母
ｃｈａｎｔ／ｔʃːｎｔ／；／ｔʃæｎｔ／ｎ．反复呼喊的话语；
重复唱的歌词
ｃｈａｒｔ／ｔʃːｔ／；／ｔʃːｒｔ／ｎ．图表
ｃｈｅｃｋ／ｔʃｅｋ／ｖ．检查
ｃｈｏｏｓｅ／ｔʃｕːｚ／ｖ．选择；挑选
ｃｉｒｃｌｅ／ˈｓɜːｋｌ／；／ˈｓɜːｒｋｌ／ｖ．把……圈起来
ｃｌｕｅ／ｋｌｕː／ｎ．线索；提示
ｃｏｍｐａｒｅ／ｋəｍˈｐｅə（ｒ）／；／ｋəｍˈｐｅｒ／ｖ．比较；
对比
ｃｏｍｐａｒｉｓｏｎ／ｋəｍˈｐæｒＩｓｎ／ｎ．比较；对比
ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅ／ｋəｍˈｐｌｉːｔ／ｖ．填写；完成
ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔ／ｋəˈｎｅｋｔ／ｖ．（使）连接；接通；
注意到……有关联；把……联系起来
ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ／ｋəˈｎｅｋʃｎ／ｎ．联系，关联
ｃｏｎｓｏｎａｎｔ／ˈｋɒｎｓəｎəｎｔ／；／ˈｋːｎｓəｎəｎｔ／
ｎ．辅音；辅音字母
ｃｏｎｔｉｎｕｏｕｓ／ｋəｎˈｔＩｎｊｕəｓ／ａｄｊ．（动词）进行
时的，进行式的
ｃｏｎｔｒａｓｔ／ｋəｎˈｔｒːｓｔ／；／ｋəｎˈｔｒæｓｔ／ｖ．对比；对照
／ˈｋɒｎｔｒːｓｔ／；／ˈｋːｎｔｒæｓｔ／ｎ．对比；对照
ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｋɒｎｖəˈｓｅＩʃｎ／；／ˌｋːｎｖəｒˈｓｅＩʃｎ／
ｎ．交谈，谈话
ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔ／ｋəˈｒｅｋｔ／ａｄｊ．正确的；恰当的
ｃｏｕｎｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｋａʊｎｔəｂｌ／ａｄｊ．（名词）可数的
Attached Word List 157
ｃｕｌｔｕｒａｌ／ˈｋʌｌｔʃəｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．文化的
ｄｅｓｃｒｉｂｅ／ｄＩˈｓｋｒａＩｂ／ｖ．描述
ｄｅｓｃｒｉｐｔｉｏｎ／ｄＩˈｓｋｒＩｐʃｎ／ｎ．描写（文字）；说明
ｄｅｓｉｇｎ／ｄＩˈｚａＩｎ／ｖ．设计，制图，构思
ｎ．设计，布局，安排
ｄｅｓｉｇｎｅｒ／ｄＩˈｚａＩｎə（ｒ）／ｎ．设计者
ｄｅｔａｉｌ／ˈｄｉːｔｅＩｌ／；／ｄＩˈｔｅＩｌ／ｎ．详情，细节
ｄｉａｇｒａｍ／ˌｄａＩəｇｒæｍ／ｎ．图表；示意图；简图
ｄｉｓｃｕｓｓ／ｄＩˈｓｋʌｓ／ｖ．讨论，商量
ｄｒａｆｔ／ｄｒːｆｔ／；／ｄｒæｆｔ／ｎ．草稿 ｖ．起草
ｅａｓｉｅｒ／ˈｉːｚＩə ／；／ˈｉｚｉə ／ａｄｊ．更简单；容易些
（ｅａｓｙ的比较级形式）
ｅｓｓａｙ／ˈｅｓｅＩ／ｎ．文章，短文
ｅｖｅｎｔ／Ｉˈｖｅｎｔ／ｎ．大事；比赛项目
ｅｘａｍｐｌｅ／Ｉｇˈｚːｍｐｌ／；／Ｉｇˈｚæｍｐｌ／ｎ．例子
ｅｘｃｅｌｌｅｎｔ／ˈｅｋｓəｌəｎｔ／ａｄｊ．优秀的；杰出的
ｅｘｐｒｅｓｓ／Ｉｋˈｓｐｒｅｓ／ｖ．表达
ｆａｃｔ／ｆæｋｔ／ｎ．事实，真相
ｆａｉｒ／ｆｅə（ｒ）／；／ｆｅｒ／ａｄｊ．可以接受的
ｆａｌｌ／ｆɔːｌ／ｖ．落下；下落
ｆａｌｓｅ／ｆɔːｌｓ／ａｄｊ．错误的
ｆｉｌｌ／ｆＩｌ／ｖ．填补；（使）充满
ｆｉｎａｌ／ˈｆａＩｎｌ／ａｄｊ．最终的
ｆｏｃｕｓ／ˈｆəʊｋəｓ／ｖ．集中（注意力、精力等于）
ｆｏｌｌｏｗ／ˈｆɒｌəʊ／；／ˈｆːｌəʊ／ｖ．遵循；跟随
ｆｏｌｌｏｗｉｎｇ／ˈｆɒｌəʊＩ／；／ˈｆːｌəʊＩ／ａｄｊ．下列的
ｆｏｒｅｉｇｎ／ˈｆɒｒəｎ／；／ˈｆɔːｒəｎ／ａｄｊ．外国的；
外交的；陌生的
ｆｏｒｍ／ｆɔːｍ／；／ｆɔːｒｍ／ｎ．词形；形式
ｆｒｅｑｕｅｎｃｙ／ˈｆｒｉːｋｗəｎｓｉ／ｎ．发生率；频率
ｇｒｅｅｔ／ｇｒｉːｔ／ｖ．和（某人）打招呼（或问好）；
欢迎
ｇｒｅｅｔｉｎｇ／ˈｇｒｉːｔＩ／ｎ．问候；致意
ｇｒｏｕｐ／ｇｒｕːｐ／ｎ．组；群
ｈｏｂｂｙ／ˈｈɒｂｉ／；／ˈｈːｂｉ／ｎ．业余爱好
ｈｉｇｈｌａｎｄ／ˈｈａＩｌəｎｄ／ｎ．高地，高原
ａｄｊ．高地的；高原的
ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｙ／ａＩˈｄｅｎｔＩｆａＩ／ｖ．辨认；找到
ｉｍｐｒｏｖｅ／Ｉｍˈｐｒｕːｖ／ｖ．改进；改善
ｉｍｐｒｏｖｅｍｅｎｔ／Ｉｍˈｐｒｕːｖｍəｎｔ／ｎ．改善；改进
ｉｎｃｌｕｄｅ／Ｉｎˈｋｌｕːｄ／ｖ．包括；包含
ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ／ˌＩｎｆəˈｍｅＩʃｎ／；／ˌＩｎｆəｒˈｍｅＩʃｎ／
ｎ．信息，消息
ｉｎｔｏ／ˈＩｎｔə；ˈＩｎｔｕː／ｐｒｅｐ．到……里面；朝，向
ｉｎｔｏｎａｔｉｏｎ／ˌＩｎｔəˈｎｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．语调；音准
ｉｎｔｒｏｄｕｃｅ／ˌＩｎｔｒəˈｄｊｕːｓ／；／ˌＩｎｔｒəˈｄｕːｓ／ｖ．介绍，
引见
ｉｎｖｉｔｅ／ＩｎˈｖａＩｔ／ｖ．邀请（某人出席社交场合）
ｉｔｅｍ／ˈａＩｔəｍ／ｎ．项目；物件
ｊｕｓｔ／ｄʒʌｓｔ／ａｄｖ．仅仅；刚才；只是
ｋｅｙ／ｋｉː／ａｄｊ．关键的；最重要的
ｋｎｏｗｌｅｄｇｅ／ˈｎɒｌＩｄʒ ／；／ˈｎːｌＩｄʒ ／ｎ．知识；学问
ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ／ˈｌæｇｗＩｄʒ ／ｎ．语言
ｌｅｔｔｅｒ／ˈｌｅｔə（ｒ）／ｎ．字母；信件
ｌｉａｉｓｏｎ／ｌｉˈｅＩｚｎ／；／ｌｉˈｅＩｚːｎ／ｎ．连读；联系；联络
ｌｉｎｅ／ｌａＩｎ／ｎ．线；线条
ｌｉｎｋ／ｌＩｋ／ｖ．把……连接起来 ｎ．联系；关系
ｌｉｓｔ／ｌＩｓｔ／ｎ．清单 ｖ．列举；列清单
ｍａｒｋ／ｍːｋ／；／ｍːｒｋ／ｖ．做标记；标明
（位置／方向） ｎ．符号；记号
Attached Word List
158
ｍａｔｃｈ／ｍæｔʃ ／ｖ．配对；相配
ｍｅａｎｉｎｇ／ˈｍｉːｎＩ／ｎ．意义；意思
ｍｏｄａｌ／ˈｍəʊｄｌ／ａｄｊ．情态的
ｍｏｎｏｌｏｇｕｅ／ˈｍɒｎəｌɒｇ／；／ˈｍːｎəｌɔːｇ／
（ｍｏｎｏｌｏｇＡｍＥ）ｎ．独白
ｎｅｇａｔｉｖｅ／ˈｎｅｇəｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．否定的；消极的；
悲观的
ｎｏｔｉｃｅ／ˈｎəʊｔＩｓ／ｖ．注意
ｎｏｔｉｏｎａｌ实义的
ｎｏｕｎ／ｎａʊｎ／ｎ．名词
ｎｕｍｂｅｒ／ˈｎʌｍｂə（ｒ）／ｎ．数字；数 ｖ．标号；
给……编号
ｏｂｊｅｃｔ／ˈɒｂｄʒｅｋｔ／；／ˈːｂｄʒｅｋｔ／ｎ．物体；宾语
ｏｐｉｎｉｏｎ／əˈｐＩｎｊəｎ／ｎ．意见；想法
ｏｒｄｅｒ／ˈɔːｄə（ｒ）／；／ˈɔːｒｄəｒ／ｎ．顺序
ｏｒｄｉｎａｌ／ˈɔːｄＩｎｌ／；／ˈɔːｒｄəｎｌ／ｎ．序数词
ｏｒｇａｎｉｚｅ／ˈɔːｇəｎａＩｚ／；／ˈɔːｒｇəｎａＩｚ／ｖ．组织
ｐａｒａｇｒａｐｈ／ˈｐæｒəｇｒːｆ／；／ˈｐæｒəｇｒæｆ／ｎ．段落
ｐａｒｔｎｅｒ／ˈｐːｔｎə（ｒ）／；／ˈｐːｒｔｎəｒ／ｎ．同伴；
搭档
ｐｅｒｆｏｒｍ／ｐəˈｆɔːｍ／；／ｐəｒˈｆɔːｒｍ／ｖ．执行；做
ｐｅｒｓｏｎ／ˈｐɜːｓｎ／；／ˈｐɜːｒｓｎ／ｎ．人
ｐｅｒｓｏｎａｌ／ˈｐɜːｓəｎｌ／；／ˈｐɜːｒｓəｎｌ／ａｄｊ．个人的，
私人的
ｐｈｒａｓｅ／ｆｒｅＩｚ／ｎ．短语；词组
ｐｌｏｔ／ｐｌɒｔ／；／ｐｌːｔ／ｎ．故事情节
ｐｌｕｒａｌ／ˈｐｌʊəｒəｌ／；／ˈｐｌʊｒəｌ／ａｄｊ．复数的
ｎ．复数，复数形式
ｐｏｉｎｔ／ｐɔＩｎｔ／ｎ．重点；观点
ｐｏｓｉｔｉｖｅ／ˈｐɒｚəｔＩｖ／；／ˈｐːｚəｔＩｖ／ａｄｊ．肯定的；
正面的
ｐｏｓｓｅｓｓｉｖｅ／ｐəˈｚｅｓＩｖ／ａｄｊ．表示所属关系的；
所有格的
ｐｒａｃｔｉｓｅ／ˈｐｒæｋｔＩｓ／（ｐｒａｃｔｉｃｅＡｍＥ）ｖ．练习
ｐｒｅｄｉｃｔ／ｐｒＩˈｄＩｋｔ／ｖ．预言；预告
ｐｒｅｄｉｃｔｉｏｎ／ｐｒＩˈｄＩｋʃｎ／ｎ．预言；预测
ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ／ˈｐｒəʊｇｒæｍ／ｎ．节目
ｐｒｏｊｅｃｔ／ˈｐｒɒｄʒｅｋｔ／；／ˈｐｒːｄʒｅｋｔ／ｎ．专题
研究；生产（或研究等）项目
ｐｒｏｎｏｕｎ／ˈｐｒəʊｎａʊｎ／ｎ．代词
ｐｒｏｎｕｎｃｉａｔｉｏｎ／ｐｒəˌｎʌｎｓｉˈｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．发音；读音
ｐｒｏｐｅｒ／ˈｐｒɒｐə（ｒ）／；／ˈｐｒːｐəｒ／ａｄｊ．正确的；
恰当的
ｐｕｎｃｔｕａｔｉｏｎ／ˌｐʌｋｔʃｕˈｅＩʃｎ／ｎ．标点符号
ｐｕｒｐｏｓｅ／ˈｐɜːｐəｓ／；／ˈｐɜːｒｐəｓ／ｎ．意图；目的
ｑｕｉｃｋｌｙ／ˈｋｗＩｋｌｉ／ａｄｖ．迅速地；很快地
ｒａｔｅ／ｒｅＩｔ／ｖ．评估，评价；划分等级
ｒｅｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ／ｒＩˈｋɔːｄＩ／；／ｒＩˈｋɔːｒｄＩ／ｎ．录音；
视频
ｒｅｐｅａｔ／ｒＩˈｐｉːｔ／ｖ．重复
ｒｅｐｌａｃｅ／ｒＩˈｐｌｅＩｓ／ｖ．代替；替换
ｒｅｐｏｒｔ／ｒＩˈｐɔːｔ／；／ｒＩˈｐɔːｒｔ／ｖ．汇报；报道
ｒｅｓｐｏｎｓｅ／ｒＩˈｓｐɒｎｓ／；／ｒＩˈｓｐːｎｓ／ｎ．答复；反应
ｒｅｔｅｌｌ／ˌｒｉːˈｔｅｌ／ｖ．复述
ｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ／ˌｒｉːˈｒａＩｔ／ｖ．重写；改写
ｓｃａｎ／ｓｋæｎ／ｖ．粗略地读，浏览
ｓｅａｒｃｈ／ｓɜːｔʃ ／；／ｓɜːｒｔʃ ／ｖ．搜寻；查找
ｓｅｎｔｅｎｃｅ／ˈｓｅｎｔəｎｓ／ｎ．句子
ｓｈａｒｅ／ʃｅə（ｒ）／；／ʃｅｒ／ｖ．分享；共有，合用；分担
ｎ．股份，股票；（共有财产的）部分所有权
Attached Word List 159
ｓｉｍｉｌａｒ／ˈｓＩｍəｌə（ｒ）／ａｄｊ．相像的；类似的
ｓｉｍｐｌｅ／ˈｓＩｍｐｌ／ａｄｊ．一般的；简单的；易做的
ｓｋｉｌｌ／ｓｋＩｌ／ｎ．技巧，技能
ｓｋｉｍ／ｓｋＩｍ／ｖ．浏览；略读
ｓｐｅｌｌ／ｓｐｅｌ／ｖ．拼写
ｓｐｉｒｉｔ／ˈｓｐＩｒＩｔ／ｎ．精神，心灵；情绪，心境
ｓｔａｔｅｍｅｎｔ／ˈｓｔｅＩｔｍəｎｔ／ｎ．陈述；说明
ｓｔｒａｔｅｇｙ／ˈｓｔｒæｔəｄʒｉ／ｎ．策略
ｓｔｒｕｃｔｕｒｅ／ˈｓｔｒʌｋｔʃə（ｒ）／ｎ．结构；构造
ｓｕｉｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｓｕːｔəｂ（ə）ｌ／ａｄｊ．合适的；适宜的
ｓｕｍｍａｒｉｚｅ／ˈｓʌｍəｒａＩｚ／ｖ．总结；概括
ｓｕｍｍａｒｙ／ˈｓʌｍəｒｉ／ｎ．总结；概要
ｓｕｐｐｏｒｔ／ｓəˈｐɔːｔ／；／ｓəˈｐɔːｒｔ／ｖ．支持；帮助；
提供依据
ｔａｓｋ／ｔːｓｋ／；／ｔæｓｋ／ｎ．活动；任务，工作
ｔｅｎｓｅ／ｔｅｎｓ／ｎ．时态
ｔｈｅｍｅ／ｉːｍ／ｎ．主题，主题思想
ｔｈｒｏｕｇｈ／ｒｕː／ｐｒｅｐ．通过
ｔｉｃｋ／ｔＩｋ／ｖ．打对号；打上钩
ｔｉｍｅｔａｂｌｅ／ˈｔａＩｍｔｅＩｂｌ／ｎ．时间表
ｔｉｔｌｅ／ˈｔａＩｔｌ／ｎ．标题，题目
ｔｏｎｅ／ｔəʊｎ／ｎ．声调，音调
ｔｏｐｉｃ／ˈｔɒｐＩｋ／；／ˈｔːｐＩｋ／ｎ．话题；题目
ｕｎｄｅｒｌｉｎｅ／ˌʌｎｄəˈｌａＩｎ／；／ˌʌｎｄəｒˈｌａＩｎ／
ｖ．在（词语、句子等）下画线
ｕｎｉｏｎ／ˈｊｕːｎｉəｎ／ｎ．协会；联合会
ｕｎｉｔ／ˈｊｕːｎＩｔ／ｎ．单元
ｕｓａｇｅ／ˈｊｕːｓＩｄʒ；ˈｊｕːｚＩｄʒ ／ｎ．（词语的）用法，
惯用法
ｖｅｒｂ／ｖɜːｂ／；／ｖɜːｒｂ／ｎ．动词
ｖｉｅｗ／ｖｊｕː／ｎ．见解；视野
ｖｏｃａｂｕｌａｒｙ／ｖəˈｋæｂｊəｌəｒｉ／；／ｖəˈｋæｂｊəｌｅｒｉ／
ｎ．词汇
ｖｏｗｅｌ／ˈｖａʊəｌ／ｎ．元音；元音字母
ｗｅｌｌ⁃ｂａｌａｎｃｅｄ／ˌｗｅｌˈｂæｌəｎｓｔ／ａｄｊ．很均衡的；
很均匀的
ｗｏｒｋｐｌａｃｅ／ˈｗɜːｋｐｌｅＩｓ／；／ˈｗɜːｒｋｐｌｅＩｓ／
ｎ．工作场所
English Names & Names of Places
160
ＥｎｇｌｉｓｈＮａｍｅｓ
ＭａｌｅＮａｍｅｓ
Ａｌｌｅｎ／ˈæｌəｎ／艾伦
Ｂｏｂ／ｂɒｂ／鲍勃
Ｊｉｍ／ｄʒＩｍ／吉姆
Ｍｉｃｈａｅｌ／ˈｍａＩｋəｌ／迈克尔
Ｍｉｋｅ／ｍａＩｋ／麦克
Ｔｅｄ／ｔｅｄ／特德
Ｔｏｍ／ｔːｍ／汤姆
ＦｅｍａｌｅＮａｍｅｓ
Ｊａｎｅ／ｄʒｅＩｎ／简
Ｋａｔｅ／ｋｅＩｔ／凯特
Ｋｉｔｔｙ／ˈｋＩｔｉ／凯蒂
Ｍａｒｉａ／ｍəˈｒｉːə ／玛丽亚
Ｓａｒａｈ／ˈｓｅｒə ／莎拉
ＦａｍｉｌｙＮａｍｅｓ
Ｂｒｕｃｅ／ｂｒｕːｓ／布鲁斯
Ｇｒｅｅｎ／ｇｒｉːｎ／格林
Ｈｉｌｌ／ｈＩｌ／希尔
Ｓｍｉｔｈ／ｓｍＩ／史密斯
Ｗｈｉｔｅ／ｗａＩｔ／怀特
ＮａｍｅｓｏｆＰｌａｃｅｓ
Ａｌｔａｙ／ˈæｌｔａＩ／阿勒泰
ＡｍａｚｏｎＲａｉｎｆｏｒｅｓｔ／ˈæｍəｚːｎˈｒｅＩｎｆɔːｒＩｓｔ／
亚马孙热带雨林
Ａｍｅｒｉｃａ／əˈｍｅｒＩｋə ／美洲；美国
Ａｕｓｔｒａｌｉａ／ɔːˈｓｔｒｅＩｌｊə ／澳大利亚
Ｃａｎａｄａ／ˈｋæｎəｄə ／加拿大
Ｃｈｉｎａ／ˈｔʃａＩｎə ／中国
Ｆｒａｎｃｅ／ｆｒːｎｓ／；／ｆｒæｎｓ／法国
Ｇｒｅｅｎｌａｎｄ／ˈｇｒｉːｎｌəｎｄ／ｎ．格陵兰（北美东北
的一大岛名，属丹麦）
Ｍａｄｒｉｄ／ｍəˈｄｒＩｄ／马德里
ＮｅｗＺｅａｌａｎｄ／ˌｎ（ｊ）ｕː ˈｚｉːｌəｎｄ／新西兰
ＰｕｅｒｔａｄｅｌＳｏｌ太阳门广场
Ｒｕｓｓｉａ／ˈｒʌʃə ／俄罗斯
Ｓｐａｉｎ／ｓｐｅＩｎ／西班牙
后 记
本套教科书根据教育部最新颁布的《义务教育英语课程标准（2022年版）》（以下
简称“2022版课标”）编修。
教科书编修小组由主编、副主编和编辑组成，同时聘请肖思宇、单小明、邓华、邓
元、李澧、王若婷、廖芬芳、李艳玲、赖永晖、王培俭、梁晶等二十余人全程参与编修
工作。然后，在全国十个省区市对原教科书的使用情况进行调查，广泛收集广大师生用
户的意见和建议，深入分析原教科书中有待修订的内容。在此基础上，编修小组制订了
详细的工作方案，随即启动了编修工作。
2022年4月，2022版课标正式颁布。编修小组深入学习课标要求，深刻领会课标
精神，重新拟定了编修思路，对原教科书的整体结构、单元编排、素材选编、活动安
排、人物形象及插图等进行了全新设计。按新思路编修的教科书具有以下特色：注重
核心素养的全面与协同发展，彰显课程的育人价值；以主题为引领对单元进行整体式
编排，帮助学生形成单元主题整体概念；践行英语学习活动观，引导学生“在体验中
学习，在应用中实践，在迁移中创新”；开展思维和策略的显性教学，强调通过目标
明确、内容具体、步骤清晰的显性教学促进学生思维品质和学习能力的发展；注重学
生对中外优秀文化的学习，拓宽学生的国际视野，坚定学生的文化自信。
自初稿定稿到出版发行，本套教科书经过了多轮修改和反复打磨。其间，得到了诸
多英语教育专家、教研员和一线教师的指导和帮助，另有数百名教师和学生参与了本套
教科书的试教试用。在此，我们谨对他们的宝贵意见和辛劳付出表示衷心感谢！
教科书使用过程中，如有任何意见和建议，欢迎随时联系我们。
电子邮箱：zks_zongbianshi@163.com
联系电话：（010）63581202
